2008 Nissan 350Z User Manual

Foreword

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN

owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with

confidence. It was produced using the latest

techniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-

stand the operation and maintenance of your

vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of

driving pleasure. Please read through this

manual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet

explains details about the warranties cov-

ering your vehicle. The NISSAN Service

and Maintenance Guide explains details

about maintaining and servicing your ve-

hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer

Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will

explain how to resolve any concerns you

may have with your vehicle, as well as

clarify your rights under your state’s lemon

law.

Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best.

When you require any service or have any

questions, we will be glad to assist you with the

extensive resources available to us.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE

SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle please read

your Owner’s Manual carefully. This will

ensure familiarity with controls and main-

tenance requirements, assisting you in the

safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMA-

TION

REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

쐌 NEVER drive under the influence of

alcohol or drugs.

쐌 ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for condi-

tions.

쐌 ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving and avoid using vehicle fea-

tures or taking other actions that

could distract you.

쐌 ALWAYS use your seat belts. Refer to

“Child safety” and “Child restraints”

in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” sec-

tion for precautions regarding chil-

dren.

쐌 ALWAYS provide information about

the proper use of vehicle safety fea-

tures to all occupants of the vehicle.

쐌 ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual

for important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modi-

fication could affect its performance,

safety or durability, and may even violate

governmental regulations. In addition,

damage or performance problems result-

ing from modification may not be covered

under NISSAN warranties.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all

options available on this model. There-

fore, you may find some information that

does not apply to your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations in

this manual are those in effect at the time of

printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change

specifications or design at any time without

notice.

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

IMPORTANT INFORMATION

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual.

They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause death or serious

personal injury. To avoid or reduce the

risk, the procedures must be followed

precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause minor or moder-

ate personal injury or damage to your

vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the

procedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do

this” or “Do not let this happen”.

If you see a symbol similar to these in an

illustration, it means the arrow points to the front

of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

call attention to an item in the illustration.

SIC0697

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain

or emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth

defects or other reproductive harm. In

addition, certain fluids contained in ve-

hicles and certain products of compo-

nent wear contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to cause

cancer and birth defects or other repro-

ductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-

ies, may contain perchlorate material. The

following advisory is provided: “Perchlor-

ate Material — special handling may apply,

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate.”

BLUETOOTH is a trademark

owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,

U.S.A. and licenced to Visteon

Corporation.

XM Radio requires subscrip-

tion, sold separately after first

90 days. Not available in Alaska,

Hawaii or Guam. For more infor-

mation, visit www.xmradio.com.

TOKYO, JAPAN

reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted

in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical,

photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior

written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE

PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES ...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer

are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your

NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you

would like to provide NISSAN directly with

comments or questions, please contact the

NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using

our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for

the following information:

— Your name, address, and telephone

number

— Vehicle identification number (attached to the

top of the instrument panel on the driver’s

side)

— Date of purchase

— Current odometer reading

— Your NISSAN dealer’s name

— Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the information

on the left at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio

systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints .......................... 0-2

Exterior front ........................................................................... 0-3

Exterior rear ............................................................................ 0-4

Coupe models .................................................................. 0-4

Roadster models .............................................................. 0-5

Passenger compartment ...................................................... 0-6

Coupe models .................................................................. 0-6

Roadster models .............................................................. 0-8

Instrument panel ................................................................. 0-10

Meters and gauges ........................................................... 0-11

Engine compartment ......................................................... 0-12

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

1. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(Page 1-28)

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-

mental air bags* (P.1-28)

3. Seat belts (P.1-10)

4. Seats (P.1-2)

— Child restraints (P.1-17)

5. Head restraints (P.1-9)

— Front-seat Active Head Restraints

(P.1-10)

6. Child restraint anchor point* (for top tether

strap child restraint) (P.1-24)

7. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-

sor)

— Advanced air bag system (P.1-35)

8. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemen-

tal air bags* (P.1-28)

9. Seat belt pretensioner (P.1-41)

*: if so equipped

SSI0255

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND

CHILD RESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

1. Hood (P.3-8)

2. Windshield wiper and washer

— Switch (P.2-21)

— Wiper replacement (P.8-19)

— Washer fluid (P.8-14)

3. Power windows (P.2-39)

— Automatic adjusting function (P.2-40,

P.8-15)

4. Recovery hook installation (P.6-12)

License plate installation (P.9-12)

5. Headlight, park and turn signal lights

— Switch (P.2-24)

— Bulb (P.8-27)

6. Tires

— Wheels and tires (P.8-30, P.9-8)

— Flat tire (P.6-2)

— Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

(P.2-13, P.5-3)

7. Outside mirrors (P.3-27)

8. Doors

— Keys (P.3-2)

— Door locks (P.3-3)

— Keyfob (P.3-5)

SSI0289

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

COUPE MODELS

1. Antenna (P.4-30)

2. Rear hatch release switch (P.3-9)

3. Rear window defroster (P.2-23)

4. High-mounted stop light (Bulb) (P.8-28)

5. Satellite radio antenna* (P.4-13)

6. Rear window wiper and washer

— Switch (P.2-22)

— Washer fluid (P.8-14)

7. License plate lights (Bulb) (P.8-28)

8. Rear hatch release (secondary) (P.3-12)

9. Luggage compartment light (P.2-42, P.8-28)

10. Back-up, Turn signal light (Bulb) (P.8-28)

11. Side marker, Stop/Tail light (Bulb) (P.8-28)

12. Fuel

— Fuel-filler door (P.3-23)

— Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)

*: if so equipped

SSI0152

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

ROADSTER MODELS

1. Antenna (P.4-30)

2. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-10)

3. Trunk light (P.2-42, P.8-28)

4. High-mounted stop light (Bulb) (P.8-28)

5. Rear window defroster (P.2-23)

6. Soft top (P.3-13)

7. Interior trunk lid release (P.3-11)

8. License plate lights (Bulb) (P.8-28)

9. Back-up, Turn signal light (Bulb) (P.8-28)

10. Side marker, Stop/Tail light (Bulb) (P.8-28)

11. Fuel

— Fuel-filler door (P.3-23)

— Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)

SSI0003

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

COUPE MODELS

1. Coat hook (P.2-38)

2. Seat belts (P.1-10)

3. Seats

— Manual seats adjustment (P.1-3)

— Power seats adjustment (P.1-3)

4. Passenger seat

— Tilt lever for passenger seat (seatback)

(P.1-7)

5. Power window switch (P.2-39)/Power door

lock switch (P.3-4)

6. Outside mirror remote control switch

(P.3-27)

7. Sun visor (P.3-25)

8. Interior light (P.2-41)

9. Sunglasses holder (P.2-32)

10. Inside mirror (P.3-26)

— Automatic anti-glare inside mirror*

(P.3-26)

— HomeLink

universal transceiver*

(P.2-43)

11. Front passenger air bag status light

(P.1-36)/Microphone (Bluetooth

Hands-

Free Phone System*) (P.4-31)

12. Rear parcel box (P.2-37)

13. Rear parcel box or Navigation system*1

14. Rear floor box (P.2-35)

15. Power outlet (P.2-31)

16. Console box (P.2-35)

17. Parking brake

— Operation (P.5-15)

SSI0256

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

— Parking/Parking on hills (P.5-19)

— Checking (P.8-21)

18. Selector lever or shift lever

— Automatic transmission (P.5-10)

— Manual transmission (P.5-13)

19. Cargo net (P.2-33)

*: if so equipped

*1: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

ROADSTER MODELS

1. Seat belts (P.1-10)

2. Seats

— Power seats adjustment (P.1-4)

— Ventilated net seats* (P.1-6)

3. Passenger seat

— Power seatback tilt switch (P.1-7)

— Cancel switch (P.1-8)

4. Power window switch (P.2-39)/Power door

lock switch (P.3-4)

5. Outside mirror remote control switch

(P.3-27)

6. Soft top latch lever (P.3-16)

7. Safety switch for soft top latch lever (P.3-16)

8. Interior light (P.2-41)

9. Front passenger air bag status light (P.1-36)

10. Inside mirror (P.3-26)

— Automatic anti-glare inside mirror*

(P.3-26)

— HomeLink

universal transceiver*

(P.2-43)

11. Rear parcel box (P.2-37)

12. Rear parcel box or Navigation system*1

13. Rear floor box (P.2-35)

— Trunk lid cancel switch (P.3-11)

— Secondary trunk lid release (P.3-12)

14. Power outlet (P.2-31)

15. Console box (P.2-35)

16. Parking brake

— Operation (P.5-15)

— Parking/Parking on hills (P.5-19)

— Checking (P.8-21)

SSI0257

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

17. Selector lever or shift lever

— Automatic transmission (P.5-10)

— Manual transmission (P.5-13)

18. Cargo net (P.2-33)

*: if so equipped

*1: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

1. Headlight/turn signal switch (P.2-24)

2. Instrument brightness control switch

(P.2-26)

3. Steering wheel switch for audio control*

(P.4-29) or switch for Bluetooth

Hands-

Free Phone System* (P.4-31)

4. Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-28)/Horn

(P.2-27)

5. Meters/gauges (P.2-3)

6. Cruise control main/set switch* (P.5-16)

7. Trip computer mode/setting switch (P.2-8)

8. Wiper/washer switch (P.2-21)

9. Center ventilator (P.4-8)

10. Passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-28)

11. Side ventilators (P.4-8)

12. Soft top operating switch (for Roadster

models) (P.3-13)

13. VDC (Vehicle dynamic control) OFF switch*

(P.2-29) or TCS (Traction control system)

OFF switch* (P.2-29)

14. Fuel-filler door opener switch (P.3-23)

15. Hood lock release handle (P.3-8)

16. Fuse box (P.8-23)

17. Tilting steering wheel lock lever (P.3-25)

18. Ignition switch (P.5-6)

19. Navigation system display (P.4-2)*1 or In-

strument pocket (P.2-32)

20. Audio system (P.4-12)/Clock (P.2-30)

21. Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch (P.2-23)

22. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-27)

23. Cup holder (P.2-33)

24. Heated seat switch* (P.2-28)

25. Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-9)

26. Power outlet (P.2-31)

*: if so equipped

*1: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

SIC3266

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

1. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-11)

2. Turn signal/hazard indicator lights (P.2-26)

3. Tachometer (P.2-5)

4. Speedometer (P.2-4)

5. Instrument brightness control switch

(P.2-26)

6. Fuel gauge (P.2-6)

7. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-5)

8. Automatic transmission position indicator

(P.2-15, P.5-10) or Manual transmission up-

shift indicator (P.2-10, P.5-14)

9. Reset knob for trip odometer (P.2-4)

10. Odometer (Total/Twin trip) (P.2-4)

11. Trip computer setting switch (P.2-8)

12. Trip computer mode switch (P.2-8)

13. Trip computer (P.2-8)

14. Engine oil pressure gauge (P.2-7)

15. Volt meter (P.2-8)

SIC3329

Combination meter

SIC1948A

Triple meter

METERS AND GAUGES

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-21)

2. Battery (P.8-15)

3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-9)

4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-13)

5. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T models) (P.8-13)

6. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-14)

7. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-12)

8. Air cleaner (P.8-18)

9. Radiator filler cap (P.8-8)

10. Engine drive belts (P.8-17)

11. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-8)

12. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-9)

Do not tamper with the strut tower bar

adjustment

쎻

. The strut tower bar has

been adjusted to the most suitable posi-

tion at the factory.

SDI2050

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-

mental restraint system

Seats ........................................................................................ 1-2

Front manual seat adjustment

(for Coupe models) ........................................................ 1-3

Front power seat adjustment

(for Coupe models — if so equipped) ...................... 1-3

Front power seat adjustment

(for Roadster models) .................................................... 1-4

Seat lifter (for driver’s seat) ......................................... 1-6

Tilting and reclining passenger’s seat from driver’s

seat ..................................................................................... 1-7

Head restraint adjustment ............................................ 1-9

Front-seat Active Head Restraints (except for

ventilated net seats)...................................................... 1-10

Seat belts ............................................................................. 1-10

Precautions on seat belt usage ................................ 1-10

Child safety .................................................................... 1-12

Pregnant women .......................................................... 1-13

Injured persons ............................................................. 1-14

Three-point type seat belt with retractor ............... 1-14

Seat belt extenders ...................................................... 1-16

Seat belt maintenance ................................................ 1-17

Child restraints ................................................................... 1-17

Precautions on child restraints ................................. 1-17

Child restraint installation on front passenger

seat (Coupe models only) .......................................... 1-20

Top tether strap child restraint

(Coupe models only) ................................................... 1-24

Booster seats ....................................................................... 1-25

Precautions on booster seats .................................... 1-25

Booster seat installation on front passenger

seat.................................................................................... 1-27

Supplemental restraint system ....................................... 1-28

Precautions on supplemental restraint system ..... 1-28

Supplemental air bag warning labels ...................... 1-42

Supplemental air bag warning light ......................... 1-43

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

WARNING

쐌 Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap

belt and receive serious internal

injuries.

쐌 For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back in the seat with both feet

on the floor and adjust the seat prop-

erly. See “Precautions on seat belt

usage” later in this section.

쐌 After adjustment, gently rock in the

seat to make sure it is securely

locked.

쐌 Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-

ingly activate switches or controls.

Unattended children could become

involved in serious accidents.

쐌 Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation. The seat may

move suddenly and could cause loss

of control of the vehicle.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts to

avoid possible injuries and/or damages.

SSS0133

SEATS

1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

FRONT MANUAL SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (for Coupe models)

쎻

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up while you slide the seat forward

or backward to the desired position. Release the

lever to lock the seat in position.

When sliding the passenger’s seat backward,

be careful not to crush items in the seatback

pocket against the rear floor box.

쎻

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and

lean back. To bring the seatback forward again,

pull the lever and move your body forward. The

seatback will move forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage”

later in this section. The seatback may also be

reclined to allow occupants to rest when the

vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the

P (Park) position or N (Neutral) position with the

parking brake fully applied.

WARNING

The seatback should not be reclined any

more than needed for comfort. Seat

belts are most effective when the pas-

senger sits well back and straight up in

the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

being injured is increased.

FRONT POWER SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (for Coupe models —

if so equipped)

Operating tips

쐌 The seat motor has an auto-reset overload

protection circuit. If the motor stops during

operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate

the switch.

쐌 Do not operate the power support seat

for a long period of time when the engine is

off. This will discharge the battery.

SSS0394

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

쎻

Forward and backward

Moving the sliding switch forward or backward

will slide the seat forward or backward to the

desired position.

When sliding the passenger’s seat backward,

be careful not to crush items in the seatback

pocket against the rear floor box.

쎻

Reclining (for driver’s seat)

Move the reclining switch backward until the

desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback

forward, move the switch forward and move your

body forward. The seatback will move forward.

쎻

Reclining (for passenger’s seat)

The passenger’s seat is equipped with a manual

lever for reclining. See “Front manual seat ad-

justment” earlier in this section.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage”

later in this section. The seatback may also be

reclined to allow occupants to rest when the

vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the

P (Park) or N (Neutral) position with the parking

brake fully applied.

WARNING

The seatback should not be reclined any

more than needed for comfort. Seat

belts are most effective when the pas-

senger sits well back and straight up in

the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

being injured is increased.

FRONT POWER SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (for Roadster models)

Operating tips

쐌 The seat motor has an auto-reset overload

protection circuit. If the motor stops during

operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate

the switch.

쐌 Do not operate the power support seat

for a long period of time when the engine is

off. This will discharge the battery.

SPA1793

1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

쎻

Forward and backward

Moving the sliding switch forward or backward

will slide the seat forward or backward to the

desired position.

When sliding the passenger’s seat backward,

be careful not to crush items in the seatback

pocket against the rear floor box.

쎻

Reclining

Move the reclining switch backward until the

desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback

forward, move the switch forward and move your

body forward. The seatback will move forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage”

later in this section. The seatback may also be

reclined to allow occupants to rest when the

vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the

P (Park) or N (Neutral) position with the parking

brake fully applied.

WARNING

The seatback should not be reclined any

more than needed for comfort. Seat

belts are most effective when the pas-

senger sits well back and straight up in

the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

being injured is increased.

Automatic passenger seatback tilt

function

The passenger seatback will automatically tilt

forward and backward during the soft top

open/close operation. If you need to cancel this

function or when a child restraint is installed in

the passenger’s seat, push the seatback tilt

cancel switch to the CANCEL position. For more

information about operation conditions, see

“Soft top” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section. For the cancel switch, see

“Tilting and reclining passenger’s seat from driv-

er’s seat” later in this section.

SSS0472

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Ventilated net seats (if so equipped)

The ventilated net seats are designed for good

ventilation while driving. Net cloth is used on the

surface of the seatback and the cushion as

shown.

CAUTION

쐌 The seat is made of netted materials.

Be careful not to snag your jewelry,

such as a ring, bracelet or watch, on

the seat.

쐌 When using these seats, avoid wear-

ing clothing with soft fabrics (wool,

etc.). Clothing may be damaged as it

rubs against the netted material.

SEAT LIFTER (for driver’s seat)

Type A (except for ventilated net seat)

Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of

the seat cushion to the desired position.

SSS0272 SPA1715

Type A

1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Type B (for ventilated net seat)

Turn the dial and adjust the angle of the seat

cushion to the desired position.

TILTING AND RECLINING

PASSENGER’S SEAT FROM

DRIVER’S SEAT

The passenger seatback can be adjusted from

the driver’s seat to make it easier for the driver to

use the rear parcel box or rear floor box, or to

help the passenger get in the vehicle.

Coupe models (manual type)

To tilt or recline the passenger seatback, pull up

the lever

쎻

located on the back side of it, and

move the seatback forward or backward.

Roadster models (power type)

The power seatback tilt switch 쎻

and the

seatback tilt cancel switch

쎻

are located on the

back side of the passenger seatback as shown.

Tilting/reclining operation:

To tilt the passenger seatback forward, push the

top (

side) of the power seatback tilt

switch

쎻

for more than 0.5 second. The seat-

back will automatically tilt forward. To stop the

movement, push the top or bottom of the switch.

To tilt or adjust the seatback backward, push

and hold the bottom (

side) of the power

SSS0202

Type B

SSS0203

Coupe models

SSS0273

Roadster models — Type A

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

seatback tilt switch. While the switch is held

down, the seatback will move backward to the

original position that was last selected using the

reclining switch (located on the seat cushion).

Release the switch to stop the movement.

Operation conditions:

The power seatback tilt switch does not activate

under the following conditions.

쐌 when the passenger seat sliding/reclining

switches on the seat cushion are being op-

erated.

쐌 when the seat tilt cancel switch is in the

CANCEL position. (See “Seatback tilt cancel

switch” later in this section.)

쐌 when the passenger seat belt is fastened.

쐌 when the vehicle speed reaches 4 MPH (7

km/h) and more.

The automatic tilting/reclining movement will be

stopped:

쐌 when any of the above 4 conditions occur.

쐌 when the power seatback tilt switch (top or

bottom) is pushed again.

쐌 when the seatback is moved with the soft top

open/close operation.

When this interruption occurs, you cannot move

the seatback backward from the stopped posi-

tion with the power seatback tilt switch. Use the

reclining switch (on the seat cushion) to select

the seatback position.

Seatback tilt cancel switch:

When the seatback tilt cancel switch

쎻

pushed to the CANCEL position, the

tilting/reclining operation using the power seat-

back tilt switch

쎻

will be cancelled. Only the

sliding/reclining switches (located on the seat

cushion) are operational. Push the seatback tilt

cancel switch to the AUTO position to reactivate

the power seatback tilt switch.

This cancel switch is linked with the automatic

passenger seatback tilt function of the soft top

operation. See “Soft top” in the “3. Pre-driving

checks and adjustments” section.

SSS0274

Roadster models — Type B

SSS0275

1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

CAUTION

When a child restraint is installed in the

passenger seat, be sure to turn the seat-

back tilt cancel switch to the CANCEL

position. Otherwise, the child restraint

may be damaged.

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT

To raise the head restraint, just pull it up. To

lower, push the lock knob

쎻

and push the head

restraint down.

The ventilated net seats (if so equipped for

Roadster models) have non-adjustable head

restraints.

Adjust the head restraints so the center is level

with the center of your ears.

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted

properly as they may provide significant

protection against injury in an accident.

Do not remove them. Check the adjust-

ment after someone else uses the seat.

SSS0204 SSS0178A

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEAD

RESTRAINTS (except for ventilated

net seats)

WARNING

쐌 Always adjust the head restraints

properly as specified in the previous

section. Failure to do so can reduce

the effectiveness of the active head

restraint.

쐌 Active Head Restraints are designed

to supplement other safety systems.

Always wear seat belts. No system

can prevent all injuries in any acci-

dent.

쐌 Do not attach anything to the head

restraint stalks. Doing so could im-

pair Active Head Restraint function.

The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-

ing the force that the seatback receives from the

occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement

of the head restraint helps support the occu-

pant’s head by reducing its backward movement

and helping absorb some of the forces that may

lead to whiplash type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for colli-

sions at low to medium speeds in which it is said

that whiplash injury occurs most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certain

rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head

restraints return to their original positions.

Properly adjust the Active Head Restraints as

described in the previous section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-

justed and you are sitting upright and well back

in your seat with both feet on the floor, your

chances of being injured or killed in an accident

and/or the severity of injury may be greatly

reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and

all of your passengers to buckle up every time

you drive, even if your seating position includes a

supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories require that seat belts be

worn at all times when a vehicle is being

driven.

SSS0508

SEAT BELTS

1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

WARNING

쐌 Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times.

쐌 The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so

may reduce the effectiveness of the

entire restraint system and increase

the chance or severity of injury in

an accident. Serious injury or death

can occur if the seat belt is not worn

properly.

쐌 Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never put the belt behind your back,

under your arm or across your neck.

The belt should be away from your

face and neck, but not falling off your

shoulder.

쐌 Position the lap belt as low and snug

as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT

THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high

could increase the risk of internal

injuries in an accident.

쐌 Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-

curely fastened to the proper buckle.

쐌 Do not wear the seat belt inside out

or twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

쐌 Do not allow more than one person

to use the same seat belt.

쐌 Never carry more people in the ve-

hicle than there are seat belts. This

vehicle has only two seating posi-

tions. Never allow anyone to ride in

the luggage area.

쐌 If the seat belt warning light glows

continuously while the ignition is

turned ON with all doors closed and

all seat belts fastened, it may indi-

cate a malfunction in the system.

Have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

SSS0136

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

쐌 Once a seat belt pretensioner has

activated, it cannot be reused and

must be replaced together with the

retractor. See a NISSAN dealer.

쐌 Removal and installation of the pre-

tensioner system components

should be done by a NISSAN dealer.

쐌 All seat belt assemblies, including

retractors and attaching hardware,

should be inspected after any colli-

sion by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN

recommends that all seat belt as-

semblies in use during a collision be

replaced unless the collision was mi-

nor and the belts show no damage

and continue to operate properly.

Seat belt assemblies not in use dur-

ing a collision should also be in-

spected and replaced if either dam-

age or improper operation is noted.

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this

manual, child safety information is available from

many other sources, including doctors, teachers,

government traffic safety offices, and community

organizations. Every child is different, so be sure

to learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint

systems:

쐌 Rear facing child restraint (should not be

installed in this vehicle)

쐌 Front facing child restraint (should not be

installed in the Roadster models)

쐌 Booster seat

WARNING

쐌 Never let an infant who requires the

use of a rear facing child restraint

ride in this vehicle. Do not attempt to

hold a child in your lap or arms.

쐌 Roadster models do not have an an-

chor for a top tether strap required

SSS0134

1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

for most front facing child restraints.

Never let children who require the

use of a front facing child restraint

ride in Roadster models.

쐌 Children need special protection. The

vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them

properly. The shoulder belt may come

too close to the face or neck. The lap

belt may not fit over their small hip

bones. In an accident, an improperly

fitting seat belt could cause serious

or fatal injury. Always use appropri-

ate child restraints.

쐌 Never let a child stand or kneel on

any seat and do not allow a child in

the cargo areas while the vehicle is

moving. The child could be seriously

injured or killed in an accident or

sudden stop.

Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental

front impact air bag system for the front passen-

ger. See “Supplemental restraint system” later in

this section. The passenger seat is not suitable

for use with a rear facing child restraint needed

for infants. Therefore, infants should not be

transported in this vehicle.

All US states and provinces of Canada require

the use of approved child restraints for infants

and small children. (See “Child restraints” later in

this section.)

Also, there are other types of child restraints

available for larger children for additional protec-

tion.

Infants

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed

in a rear facing child restraint. Because a rear

facing child restraint is not suitable for use in this

vehicle, infants should not be transported in it.

Small children

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at

least 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward

facing child restraint (except Roadster models).

Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for mini-

mum and maximum weight and height recom-

mendations. NISSAN recommends that small

children be placed in child restraints that comply

with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You

should choose a child restraint that fits your

vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child restraint

systems should be seated and restrained by the

seat belts which are provided. The seat belt may

not fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in

(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18

kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be

used to obtain proper seat belt fit.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a

commercially available booster seat if the shoul-

der belt in the child’s seating position fits close

to the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat

belt goes across the abdomen. The booster seat

should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is

properly positioned across the top, middle por-

tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the

hips. A booster seat can only be used in seating

positions that have a three-point type seat belt.

The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and

have a label certifying that it complies with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Ca-

nadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once

the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no

longer on or near the face and neck, use the

shoulder belt without the booster seat.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use

seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,

and always position the lap belt as low as

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

possible around the hips, not the waist. Place

the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across

your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over

your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for

specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons use

seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with

your doctor for specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

쐌 Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times.

쐌 Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap

belt and receive serious internal inju-

ries.

쐌 For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back in the seat with both feet

on the floor and adjust the seat belt

properly.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this

section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the tongue into the buckle until it

clicks.

쐌 The retractor is designed to lock during

a sudden stop or on impact. A slow

pulling motion will permit the belt to

move, and allow you some freedom of

movement in the seat.

쐌 If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its

fully retracted position, firmly pull the

SSS0292A

1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

belt and release it. Then smoothly pull

the belt out of the retractor.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the

shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder

and across your chest.

The front passenger seat belt has two modes of

operation:

쐌 Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

쐌 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow

the driver and passenger some freedom of

movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat

belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or

during certain impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode

(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child

restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt

cannot be extended again until the seat belt

tongue is detached from the buckle and fully

retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode

after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional

information, see “Child restraints” later in this

section.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During normal

seat belt use by a passenger, the ALR

mode should not be activated. If it is acti-

vated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt

tension.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be cer-

tain that the seatbacks are completely

secured in the latched position. If they

are not completely secured, passengers

may be injured in an accident or sudden

stop.

SSS0290A

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the belt, push the button on the

buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract.

Checking seat belt operation

Your seat belt retractors are designed to lock

belt movement using two separate methods:

쐌 when the belt is pulled quickly from the

retractor.

쐌 when the vehicle slows down rapidly.

You can check their operation as follows:

쐌 grasp the shoulder belt and pull quickly for-

ward. The retractor should lock and restrict

further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check or

if you have any questions about belt operation,

see a NISSAN dealer.

Shoulder belt arm

The shoulder belt arm should be adjusted to the

position best for you. (See “Precautions on seat

belt usage” earlier in this section.)

To adjust, pull the shoulder belt arm. Pulling the

arm forward will allow an easy access to the belt.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is

not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt

and fasten it, an extender is available. The ex-

tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of

length and may be used for either the driver or

passenger seating position. See a NISSAN

SSS0326 SSS0588

1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

dealer for assistance if the extender is required.

WARNING

쐌 Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,

made by the same company which

made the original equipment seat

belts, should be used with NISSAN

seat belts.

쐌 Persons who can use the standard

seat belt should not use an extender.

Such unnecessary use could result in

serious personal injury in the event

of an accident.

쐌 Never use seat belt extenders to in-

stall child restraints. If the child re-

straint is not secured properly, the

child could be seriously injured in a

collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

쐌 To clean the seat belt webbings, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-

mended for cleaning upholstery or carpets.

Then brush the webbing, wipe it with a cloth

and allow it to dry in the shade. Do not allow

the seat belts to retract until they are com-

pletely dry.

쐌 If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of

the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may

retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide

with a clean, dry cloth.

쐌 Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components such as

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires

and anchors work properly. If loose parts,

deterioration, cuts or other damage on the

webbing is found, the entire belt assembly

should be replaced.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

쐌 Children should always be placed in

an appropriate child restraint while

riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a

child restraint can result in serious

injury or death.

쐌 Children should never be carried on

your lap. It is not possible for even

SSS0099

CHILD RESTRAINTS

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

the strongest adult to resist the

forces of a severe accident. The child

could be crushed between the adult

and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not

put the same seat belt around both

your child and yourself.

쐌 Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front seat.

An inflating supplemental air bag

could seriously injure or kill your

child.

쐌 Never let an infant who requires the

use of a rear facing child restraint

ride in this vehicle.

쐌 Roadster models do not have an an-

chor for a top tether strap required

for most front facing child restraints.

Never let children who require the

use of a front facing child restraint

ride in Roadster models.

쐌 Improper use or improper installation

of a child restraint can increase the

risk or severity of injury for both the

child and other occupants of the ve-

hicle and can lead to serious injury or

death in an accident.

쐌 Follow all of the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation

and use. When purchasing a child

restraint, be sure to select one which

will fit your child and vehicle. It may

not be possible to properly install

some types of child restraints in your

vehicle.

쐌 If the child restraint is not anchored

properly, the risk of a child being

injured in a collision or a sudden stop

greatly increases.

쐌 Child restraint anchor point is de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straint. Under no circumstances is it

SSS0100

1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

to be used for adult seat belts or

harnesses.

쐌 Adjustable seatbacks should be po-

sitioned to fit the child restraint, but

as upright as possible.

쐌 After attaching the child restraint,

test it before you place the child in it.

Push it from side to side while hold-

ing the seat by the seat belt path. Try

to tug it forward and check to see if

the belt holds the restraint in place.

The child restraint should not move

more than 1 in (25 mm). If the re-

straint is not secure, tighten the belt

as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seating position and test it

again. You may need to try a different

child restraint. Not all child restraints

fit in all types of vehicles.

쐌 When your child restraint is not in

use, keep it secured with a seat belt

to prevent it from being thrown

around in case of a sudden stop or

accident.

CAUTION

쐌 For Roadster models, when installing

a booster seat, be sure to turn off the

automatic passenger seatback tilt

function with the seatback tilt cancel

switch (located on the back of the

passenger seatback). Otherwise, the

booster seat may be damaged. See

“Tilting and reclining passenger’s

seat from driver’s seat” earlier in this

section for detailed information.

쐌 Remember that a child restraint left

in a closed vehicle can become very

hot. Check the seating surface and

buckles before placing your child in

the child restraint.

In general, child restraints are designed to be

installed with the lap portion of a lap/shoulder

seat belt.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for

children of various sizes. When selecting any

child restraint, keep the following points in mind:

쐌 Choose only a restraint with a label certifying

that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

쐌 Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

쐌 If the child restraint is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the child restraint

and check the various adjustments to be sure

the child restraint is compatible with your

child. Choose a child restraint that is de-

signed for your child’s height and weight.

Always follow all recommended procedures.

The passenger seat is not suitable for use with a

rear facing child restraint for infants. Therefore,

infants should not be transported in this vehicle.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

(Coupe models only)

WARNING

쐌 Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front pas-

senger seat. Front air bags inflate

with great force. A rear-facing child

restraint could be struck by the front

air bag in a crash and could seriously

injure or kill your child.

쐌 If you must install a forward facing

child restraint in the front passenger

seat, move the passenger seat to the

rearmost position. Also, be sure the

front passenger air bag status light is

illuminated to indicate the passenger

air bag is OFF. See “Front passenger

air bag and status light” in this sec-

tion for details.

쐌 The three-point seat belt in your ve-

hicle is equipped with an Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) which must

be used when installing a child re-

straint.

쐌 Failure to use the ALR mode will

result in the child restraint not being

properly secured. The restraint could

tip over or otherwise be unsecured

and cause injury to the child in a

sudden stop or collision.

SSS0261

1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Front facing

If you must install a child restraint in the front

seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the front pas-

senger seat. Move the seat to the rear-

most position. Adjust the head restraint to

its highest position (if so equipped). Always

follow the restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions.

The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback. If nec-

essary, adjust or remove the head restraint to

obtain the correct child restraint fit. See

“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this

section. If the head restraint is removed, store

it in a secure place. Be sure to install the

head restraint when the child restraint is

removed. If the seating position does not

have an adjustable head restraint and it is

interfering with the proper child restraint fit,

try a different child restraint.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

SSS0640

Front facing — step 1

SSS0360B

Front facing — step 2

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint with your knee

to compress the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

6. If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point. See “Top tether strap child restraint” in

this section.

SSS0651

Front facing — step 3

SSS0652

Front facing — step 4

SSS0653

Front facing — step 5

1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

7. Before placing the child in the child restraint,

hold the child restraint near the seat belt path

and use force to push the child restraint from

side to side, and tug it forward to make sure

that it is securely held in place. It should not

move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it does move

more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on the

shoulder belt to further tighten the child

restraint. If you are unable to properly secure

the restraint, try a different child restraint. Not

all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

8. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode

by trying to pull more seat belt out of the

retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt

webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is

in the ALR mode.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the seat

belt is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 7.

10. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

The front passenger air bag status light

should illuminate. If this light is not

illuminated, see “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section. Try a differ-

ent child restraint. Have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child

restraint mode) is canceled.

SSS0641

Front facing — step 7

SSS0681

Front facing — step 10

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD

RESTRAINT (Coupe models only)

An anchor for a child restraint with a top tether is

provided in this vehicle.

If your child restraint has a top tether strap, it

must be secured to the provided anchor point.

Secure the child restraint with the seat belt.

Guide the top tether strap under the head

restraint as illustrated, and secure it to the

anchor bracket. Tighten the strap according to

manufacturer instructions to remove any slack.

WARNING

쐌 Child restraint anchor point is de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstance is it

to be used for adult seat belts or

harnesses.

쐌 Do not allow cargo to contact the top

tether strap when it is attached to the

top tether anchor. Properly secure

the cargo so it does not contact the

top tether strap. Cargo that is not

properly secured or that contacts the

top tether strap may damage the top

tether strap during a collision. Your

child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child re-

straint top tether strap is damaged.

Anchor point location

The anchor point 쎻

is located on the luggage

area floor.

A flap is provided in the carpet for easy access

and is marked with the label shown.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap child restraint on the pas-

senger seat, consult a NISSAN dealer for

details.

SSS0207 SPA1644

1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER

SEATS

WARNING

쐌 Children should always be placed in

an appropriate child restraint while

riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a

child restraint or booster seat can

result in serious injury or death.

쐌 Children should never be carried on

your lap. It is not possible for even

the strongest adult to resist the

forces of a severe accident. The child

could be crushed between the adult

and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not

put the same seat belt around both

your child and yourself.

쐌 A booster seat must only be installed

in a seating position that has a

lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a

three-point type seat belt with a

booster seat can result in a serious

injury in sudden stop or collision.

쐌 Improper use or improper installation

of a booster seat can increase the

risk or severity of injury for both the

child and other occupants of the ve-

hicle and can lead to serious injury or

death in an accident.

쐌 Do not use towels, books, pillows or

other items in place of a booster

seat. Items such as these may move

during normal driving or a collision

and result in serious injury or death.

Booster seats are designed to be

used with a lap/shoulder belt.

Booster seats are designed to prop-

erly route the lap and shoulder por-

tions of the seat belt over the stron-

gest portions of a child’s body to

provide the maximum protection dur-

ing a collision.

쐌 Follow all of the booster seat manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation

and use. When purchasing a booster

seat, be sure to select one which will

fit your child and vehicle. It may not

be possible to properly install some

types of booster seats in your ve-

hicle.

쐌 If the booster seat and seat belt are

not used properly, the risk of a child

being injured in a collision or a sud-

den stop greatly increases.

쐌 Adjustable seatbacks should be po-

sitioned to fit the booster seat, but as

upright as possible.

쐌 After placing the child in the booster

seat and fastening the seat belt,

make sure the shoulder portion of

SSS0099

BOOSTER SEATS

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

the belt is away from the child’s face

and neck and the lap portion of the

belt does not cross the abdomen.

쐌 Do not put the shoulder belt behind

the child or under the child’s arm. If

you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, see “Booster seat instal-

lation on front passenger seat” later

in this section.

쐌 When your booster seat is not in use,

keep it secured with a seat belt to

prevent it from being thrown around

in case of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

쐌 For Roadster models, when installing

a booster seat, be sure to turn off the

automatic passenger seatback tilt

function with the seatback tilt cancel

switch (located on the back of the

passenger seatback). Otherwise, the

booster seat may be damaged. See

“Tilting and reclining passenger’s

seat from driver’s seat” earlier in this

section for detailed information.

쐌 Remember that a booster seat left in

a closed vehicle can become very hot.

Check the seating surface and buck-

les before placing your child in the

booster seat.

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by

several manufacturers. When selecting any

booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

쐌 Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

LRS0455

1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

쐌 Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

쐌 Make sure the child’s head will be properly

supported by the booster seat or vehicle

seat. The seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. For example, if a

low back booster seat

쎻

is chosen, the

vehicle seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is

lower than the center of the child’s ears, a

high back booster seat

쎻

should be used.

쐌 If the booster seat is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the booster seat

and check the various adjustments to be sure

the booster seat is compatible with your

child. Always follow all recommended proce-

dures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Auto-

matic Locking Retractor mode when us-

ing a booster seat with the seat belts.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the

front passenger seat:

If you must install a booster seat in the

front passenger seat, move the passenger

seat to the rearmost position.

1. Turn the seatback tilt cancel switch to the

CANCEL position. (Roadster models only)

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only

place it in a front facing direction. Always

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions.

SSS0363 LRS0454

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

3. The booster seat should be positioned on the

vehicle seat so that it is stable. If necessary,

adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain

the correct booster seat fit. See “Head re-

straint adjustment” earlier in this section. If

the head restraint is removed, store it in a

secure place. Be sure to install the head

restraint when the booster seat is removed. If

the seating position does not have an adjust-

able head restraint and it is interfering with

the proper booster seat fit, try a different

booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low

and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions for adjusting the belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt

toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be

sure the shoulder belt is positioned across

the top, middle portion of the child’s shoul-

der. Be sure to follow the booster seat manu-

facturer’s instructions for adjusting the belt

routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-

tions for properly fastening a seat belt shown

in the “Three-point type seat belt with retrac-

tor” earlier in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to the

ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light

may or may not illuminate

depending on the size of the child and the

type of booster seat used. See “Front pas-

senger air bag and status light” later in this

section.

PRECAUTIONS ON

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-

tion contains important information concerning

the following systems:

쐌 Driver and passenger supplemental front-

impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag

System)

쐌 Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemen-

tal air bag (if so equipped)

쐌 Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-

mental air bag (if so equipped for Coupe

models)

쐌 Seat belt pretensioner

Supplemental front-impact air bag system:

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help

cushion the impact force to the head and chest

of the driver and front passenger in certain

frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag system (if so equipped): This

system can help cushion the impact force to the

chest area of the driver and front passenger in

certain side impact collisions. The side air bags

are designed to inflate on the side where the

vehicle is impacted.

LRS0454

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM

1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-

mental air bag system (if so equipped for

Coupe models): This system can help cushion

the impact force to the head of occupants in

certain side impact collisions. The curtain air

bags are designed to inflate on the side where

the vehicle is impacted.

The supplemental restraint system is designed

to supplement the crash protection provided

by the driver and passenger seat belts and is

not a substitute for them. Seat belts should

always be correctly worn and the occupant

seated a suitable distance away from the steer-

ing wheel, instrument panel, door finishers and

side roof rails. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this

section for instructions and precautions on seat

belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ON or

START position.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the systems are operational.

WARNING

쐌 The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact,

rear impact, rollover, or lower sever-

ity frontal collision. Always wear your

seat belts to help reduce the risk or

severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents.

쐌 The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status

light is lit or if the front passenger

seat is unoccupied. See “Front pas-

senger air bag and status light” later

in this section.

쐌 The seat belts and the front air bags

are most effective when you are sit-

ting well back and upright in the seat

with both feet on the floor. The front

air bags inflate with great force. Even

with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag

System, if you are unrestrained, lean-

ing forward, sitting sideways or out

SSS0131

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

of position in any way, you are at

greater risk of injury or death in a

crash. You may also receive serious

or fatal injuries from the front air bag

if you are up against it when it in-

flates. Always sit back against the

seatback and as far away as practical

from the steering wheel or instru-

ment panel. Always use the seat

belts.

쐌 The driver and front passenger seat

belt buckles are equipped with sen-

sors that detect if the seat belts are

fastened. The Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem monitors the severity of a colli-

sion and seat belt usage then inflates

the air bags. Failure to properly wear

seat belts can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

쐌 The front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sen-

sor (pattern sensor) that turns the

front passenger air bag OFF under

some conditions. This sensor is only

used in this seat. Failure to be prop-

erly seated and wearing the seat belt

can increase the risk or severity of

injury in an accident. See “Front pas-

senger air bag and status light” later

in this section.

쐌 Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them inside

the steering wheel rim could increase

the risk that they are injured when

the front air bag inflates.

1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

SSS0132 SSS0016

SSS0006

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

WARNING

쐌 Never let an infant who requires the

use of a rear facing child restraint

ride in this vehicle. Do not attempt to

hold a child in your lap or arms. Some

examples of dangerous riding posi-

tions are shown in the previous illus-

trations.

쐌 Roadster models do not have an an-

chor for a top tether strap required

SSS0007

SSS0008

SSS0009

SSS0099

SSS0100

1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

for most front facing child restraints.

Never let children who require the

use of a front facing child restraint

ride in Roadster models.

쐌 Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air

bags or curtain air bags inflate if they

are not properly restrained.

쐌 Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front seat.

An inflating front air bag could seri-

ously injure or kill your child. See

“Child restraints” earlier in this sec-

tion for details.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact supple-

mental air bags (if so equipped):

쐌 The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event

of a frontal impact, rear impact, roll-

over or lower severity side collision.

Always wear your seat belts to help

reduce the risk or severity of injury

in various kinds of accidents.

쐌 The seat belts, side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective

when you are sitting well back and

upright in the seat. The side air bags

and curtain air bags inflate with great

force. Do not allow anyone to place

their hand, leg or face near the side

air bag on the side of the seatback of

the front seat or near the side roof

rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in

the front seat to extend their hand

out of the window or lean against the

SSS0101

SSS0159

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

door. Some examples of dangerous

riding positions are shown in the pre-

vious illustrations.

쐌 Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with

side air bag inflation.

1. Crash zone sensor

2. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules

3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-

mental air bags (if so equipped for Coupe

models)

4. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-

sor)

5. Occupant classification system control unit

6. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemen-

tal air bag modules (if so equipped)

SSS0162

SSS0680

1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

7. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

8. Satellite sensors

9. Seat belt pretensioners

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front

passenger seats. This system is designed to

meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-

lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,

all of the information, cautions and warn-

ings in this manual still apply and must be

followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is

located in the center of the steering wheel. The

passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is

mounted in the instrument panel. The front air

bags are designed to inflate in higher severity

frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the

forces in another type of collision are similar to

those of a higher severity frontal impact. They

may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Ve-

hicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper air bag system operation.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual

stage air bag inflators. It also monitors informa-

tion from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag

Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors

and the occupant classification sensor (pattern

sensor). Inflator operation is based on the sever-

ity of a collision and seat belt usage for the

driver. For the front passenger, the occupant

classification sensor is also monitored. Based on

information from the sensors, only one front air

bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the

crash severity and whether the front occupants

are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front

passenger air bag may be automatically turned

OFF under some conditions, depending on the

information provided by the occupant classifica-

tion sensor. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,

the passenger air bag status light will be illumi-

nated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not

be illuminated, but the air bag will be off.). See

“Front passenger air bag and status light” later in

this section for further details. One front air bag

inflating does not indicate improper performance

of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bag

system, contact NISSAN or a NISSAN dealer. If

you are considering modifications of your vehicle

due to a disability, you may also contact

NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the

front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise

may be heard, followed by release of smoke.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate

a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those with a

history of a breathing condition should get fresh

air promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the head and

chest of the front occupants. They can help save

lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an

inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions

or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide

restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts

should be correctly worn and the driver and

passenger seated upright as far as practical

away from the steering wheel or instrument

panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order

to help protect the front occupants. Because of

this, the force of the front air bag inflating can

increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too

close to, or is against, the air bag module during

inflation.

The air bag will deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ON or START po-

sition.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

seconds if the system is operational.

Front passenger air bag and status

light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed

to automatically turn OFF under some

conditions. Read this section carefully

to learn how it operates. Proper use of

the seat, seat belt and child restraints is

necessary for most effective protection.

Failure to follow all instructions in this

manual concerning the use of seats,

seat belts and child restraints can in-

crease the risk or severity of injury in an

accident.

Status light:

The front passenger air bag status light

located on the overhead console. The light op-

erates as follows:

쐌 Unoccupied passenger seat: The

light

is OFF and the front passenger air bag is

OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

쐌 Passenger seat occupied by a small adult,

child or child restraint as outlined in this

section: The

light illuminates to indicate

that the front passenger air bag is OFF and

will not inflate in a crash.

쐌 Occupied passenger seat and the passenger

meets the conditions outlined in this section:

The

light is OFF to indicate that the

front passenger air bag is operational.

Front passenger air bag:

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is op-

erated under some conditions as described

SSS0681

Front passenger air bag status light

1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the

front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate

in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags

in your vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce

the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag

to certain front passenger seat occupants, such

as children, by requiring the air bag to be

automatically turned OFF.

The occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-

sor) is in the front passenger seat cushion and is

designed to detect an occupant and objects on

the seat. For example, if a child is in the front

passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is

designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in

accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child

restraint of the type specified in the regulations

is on the seat, the occupant classification sensor

can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are

properly seated and using the seat belt as

outlined in this manual should not cause the

passenger air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,

however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat

properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by

sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise

being out of position), this could cause the

sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure to

be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for

the most effective protection by the seat belt and

supplemental air bag.

The occupant classification sensor is designed

to operate as described above to turn the front

passenger air bag OFF for specified child re-

straints as required by the regulations. Failing to

properly secure child restrains and to use the

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child

restraint mode) may allow the restraint to tip or

move in an accident or sudden stop. This can

also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a

crash instead of being OFF. See “Child re-

straints” earlier in this section for proper use and

installation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the

passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a

crash. However, heavy objects placed on the

seat could result in air bag inflation, because of

the object being detected by the occupant

classification sensor. Other conditions could

also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is

standing on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle occu-

pants are seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you can

monitor when the front passenger air bag is

automatically turned OFF with the seat occu-

pied. The light will not illuminate when the front

passenger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the

passenger air bag status light is illuminated

(indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be

that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting

on the seat properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,

the passenger air bag status light may or may not

be illuminated, depending on the size of the child

and the type of child restraint being used. If the

air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating

that the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could

be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being

used properly. Make sure that the child restraint

is installed properly, the seat belt is used prop-

erly and the occupant is positioned properly. If

the air bag status light is still not illuminated, try

a different child restraint.

If the passenger air bag status light will not

illuminate even though you believe that the child

restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are

properly positioned, the system may be sensing

an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is

OFF). A NISSAN dealer can check that the

system is OFF by using a special tool. However,

until you have confirmed with your dealer that

your air bag is working properly, do not transport

a child in this vehicle.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

The air bag system and passenger air bag status

light will take a few seconds to register a change

in the passenger seat status. However, if the

seat becomes unoccupied, the air bag status

light will remain off.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air

bag system, the supplemental air bag warning

light

, located in the meter and gauges

area, will blink. Have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

Other supplemental front-impact air

bag precautions

WARNING

쐌 Do not place any objects on the

steering wheel pad or on the instru-

ment panel. Also, do not place any

objects between any occupant and

the steering wheel or instrument

panel. Such objects may become

dangerous projectiles and cause in-

jury if the front air bag inflates.

쐌 Do not place objects with sharp

edges on the seat. Also, do not place

heavy objects on the seat that will

leave permanent impressions in the

seat. Such objects can damage the

seat or occupant classification sen-

sor (pattern sensor). This can affect

the operation of the air bag system

and result in serious personal injury.

쐌 Do not use water or acidic cleaners

(hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This

can damage the seat or occupant

classification sensor. This can also

affect the operation of the air bag

system and result in serious personal

injury.

쐌 Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will

be hot. Do not touch them; you may

severely burn yourself.

쐌 No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system.

This is to prevent accidental inflation

of the supplemental air bag or dam-

age to the supplemental air bag

system.

쐌 Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or front end

structure. This could affect proper

operation of the front air bag system.

쐌 Tampering with the front air bag sys-

tem may result in serious personal

injury. Tampering includes changes

to the steering wheel and the instru-

ment panel assembly by placing ma-

terial over the steering wheel pad

and above the instrument panel or by

installing additional trim material

around the air bag system.

쐌 Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing

material on the seat cushion or by

installing additional trim material,

such as seat covers, on the seat that

are not specifically designed to as-

sure proper air bag operation. Addi-

tionally, do not stow any objects un-

der the front passenger seat or the

1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

seat cushion and seatback. Such ob-

jects may interfere with the proper

operation of the occupant classifica-

tion sensor.

쐌 No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect

the front air bag system. Tampering

with the seat belt system may result

in serious personal injury.

쐌 Work on and around the front air bag

system should be done by a NISSAN

dealer. Installation of electrical

equipment should also be done by a

NISSAN dealer. The Supplemental

Restraint System (SRS) wiring

should not be modified or discon-

nected. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the air bag

system.

쐌 A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified re-

pair facility. A cracked windshield

could affect the function of the

supplemental air bag system.

쐌 The SRS wiring harness connectors

are yellow and orange for easy iden-

tification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the front air bag system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag and

roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag systems (if so

equipped)

This section includes the information about both

the side air bag system

쎻

and the curtain air

bag system

쎻

. Curtain air bags are not available

on Roadster models.

The side air bags are located in the outside of

the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air

bags are located in the side roof rails. These

systems are designed to meet voluntary guide-

SSS0209A

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

lines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-

position occupants. However, all of the infor-

mation, cautions and warnings in this

manual still apply and must be followed.

The side air bags and curtain air bags are

designed to inflate in higher severity side colli-

sions on the side that the vehicle is impacted,

although they may inflate if the forces in another

type of collision are similar to those of a higher

severity side impact. They are designed to inflate

on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They

may not inflate in certain side collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper side air bag and curtain air

bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed

by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should be

taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation

and choking. Those with a history of a breathing

condition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the chest of

the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to

cushion the impact force to the head of occu-

pants. They can help save lives and reduce

serious injuries. However, an inflating side air

bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasions or

other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags

do not provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and passenger seated upright as far as

practical away from the side air bag, and seated

as far away as practical from the door finishers

and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain

air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect

the front occupants. Because of this, the force of

the side air bags and curtain air bags inflating

can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is

too close to, or is against these air bag modules

during inflation. The side air bags and curtain air

bags will deflate quickly after the collision is

over.

The side air bags and curtain air bags

operate only when the ignition switch is in

the ON or START position.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The air bag warning light

will turn off after about 7 seconds if the

systems are operational.

WARNING

쐌 Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. Also, do

not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door fin-

isher and the front seat. Such objects

may become dangerous projectiles

and cause injury if a side air bag

inflates.

쐌 Right after inflation, several side air

bag and curtain air bag system com-

ponents will be hot. Do not touch

them; you may severely burn your-

self.

쐌 No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the side air bag and curtain air bag

systems. This is to prevent accidental

inflation of the side air bags and

curtain air bags or damage to the

side air bag and curtain air bag sys-

tems.

쐌 Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or side panel.

This could affect proper operation of

the side air bag and curtain air bag

systems.

1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

쐌 Tampering with the side air bag sys-

tem may result in serious personal

injury. For example, do not change

the front seats by placing material

near the seatback or by installing

additional trim material, such as seat

covers, around the side air bag.

쐌 Work around and on the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems should

be done by a NISSAN dealer. Instal-

lation of electrical equipment should

also be done by a NISSAN dealer.

The SRS wiring harnesses* should

not be modified or disconnected. Un-

authorized electrical test equipment

and probing devices should not be

used on the side air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors

are yellow and orange for easy iden-

tification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the side air bag and

curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to

the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Seat belts with pretensioners

WARNING

쐌 The pretensioners cannot be reused

after activation. They must be re-

placed together with the retractor

and buckle as a unit.

쐌 If the vehicle becomes involved in a

frontal collision but a pretensioner is

not activated, be sure to have the

pretensioner system checked and, if

necessary, replaced by a NISSAN

dealer.

쐌 No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the pretensioner system.

This is to prevent damage to or acci-

dental activation of the pretension-

ers. Tampering with the pretensioner

system may result in serious per-

sonal injury.

쐌 Work around and on the preten-

sioner system should be done by a

NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-

trical equipment should also be done

by a NISSAN dealer. Unauthorized

electrical test equipment and probing

devices should not be used on the

pretensioner system.

쐌 If you need to dispose of a pre-

tensioner or scrap the vehicle, con-

tact a NISSAN dealer. Correct pre-

tensioner disposal procedures are

set forth in the appropriate NISSAN

Service Manual. Incorrect disposal

procedures could cause personal

injury.

The pretensioner system activates in conjunction

with the front air bag system. Working with the

seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt

when the vehicle becomes involved in certain

types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat

occupants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt

retractor. These seat belts are used the same

way as conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. The

smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner

system, the supplemental air bag warning light

will not come on, will flash intermittently or

will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after the

ignition key has been turned to the ON or

START position. In this case, the pretensioner

may not function properly. They must be

checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to a

NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the pretensioner and

guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in

this Owner’s Manual.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental front-

impact air bag and front seat-mounted side-

impact supplemental air bag (if so equipped)

systems are placed in the vehicle as shown in

the illustration.

SSS0206

1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, display-

ing

in the instrument panel, monitors the

circuits of the supplemental front-impact air bag,

front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air

bag (if so equipped), roof-mounted curtain side-

impact supplemental air bag (if so equipped for

Coupe models) and seat belt pretensioner sys-

tems. The monitored circuits include the Air bag

Control Unit (ACU), crash zone sensor, satellite

sensors, front air bag modules, side air bag

modules, curtain air bag modules, pretensioners

and all related wiring.

After turning the ignition key to the ON position,

the supplemental air bag warning light illumi-

nates. The supplemental air bag warning light

will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag, and

pretensioner systems need servicing:

쐌 The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

쐌 The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

쐌 The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air

bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems

may not operate properly. They must be checked

and repaired. Take your vehicle to a NISSAN

dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as

soon as possible.

Repair and replacement procedure

The front air bags, side air bags (if so equipped),

curtain air bags (if so equipped for Coupe

models) and pretensioners are designed to in-

flate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder,

unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag

warning light will remain illuminated after inflation

has occurred. Repair and replacement of these

systems should be done only by a NISSAN

dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the

vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain

air bags, pretensioners and related parts should

be pointed out to the person conducting the

maintenance. The ignition key should always be

in the LOCK position when working under the

hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

쐌 Once a front air bag, side air bag or

SPA1097

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

curtain air bag has inflated, the air

bag module will not function again

and must be replaced. Additionally, if

any of the front air bags inflate, the

activated pretensioners must also be

replaced. The air bag module and

pretensioner system should be re-

placed by a NISSAN dealer. The air

bag module and pretensioner system

cannot be repaired.

쐌 The front air bag, side air bag, curtain

air bag and pretensioner systems

should be inspected by a NISSAN

dealer if there is any damage to the

front end or side portion of the ve-

hicle.

쐌 If you need to dispose of these

supplemental systems or scrap the

vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Correct disposal procedures are set

forth in the appropriate NISSAN Ser-

vice Manual. Incorrect disposal pro-

cedures could cause personal injury.

1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

MEMO

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel ................................................................... 2-2

Meters and gauges .............................................................. 2-3

Speedometer and odometer ........................................ 2-4

Tachometer ....................................................................... 2-5

Engine coolant temperature gauge ............................ 2-5

Fuel gauge ........................................................................ 2-6

Engine oil pressure gauge ........................................... 2-7

Volt meter ......................................................................... 2-8

Trip computer .................................................................. 2-8

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ........ 2-11

Checking bulbs ............................................................. 2-11

Warning lights ............................................................... 2-11

Indicator lights ............................................................... 2-15

Audible reminders ........................................................ 2-17

Security systems ................................................................ 2-18

Vehicle security system .............................................. 2-18

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ...................... 2-19

Windshield wiper and washer switch ........................... 2-21

Rear window wiper and washer switch

(Coupe models) .................................................................. 2-22

Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch .... 2-23

Headlight and turn signal switch ................................... 2-24

Xenon headlights .......................................................... 2-24

Headlight switch ........................................................... 2-24

Daytime running light system (Canada only) ........ 2-25

Turn signal switch ........................................................ 2-26

Instrument brightness control ................................... 2-26

Hazard warning flasher switch ....................................... 2-27

Horn ....................................................................................... 2-27

Heated seats (if so equipped) ........................................ 2-28

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch

(if so equipped) .................................................................. 2-29

Traction Control System (TCS) off switch

(if so equipped) .................................................................. 2-29

Clock ..................................................................................... 2-30

Adjusting the time ........................................................ 2-30

Power outlet ........................................................................ 2-31

Storage ................................................................................. 2-32

Instrument pocket (except for navigation system

equipped models) ........................................................ 2-32

Sunglasses holder (Coupe models) ........................ 2-32

Cargo net......................................................................... 2-33

Cup holders ................................................................... 2-33

Console box .................................................................. 2-35

Rear floor box ................................................................ 2-35

Rear parcel box ............................................................ 2-37

Stowing golf bags ......................................................... 2-37

Coat hook (Coupe models) ........................................ 2-38

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Windows .............................................................................. 2-39

Power windows ............................................................ 2-39

Automatic adjusting function ...................................... 2-40

Interior lights ........................................................................ 2-41

Room light ...................................................................... 2-41

Map lights ...................................................................... 2-41

Vanity mirror light ............................................................... 2-42

Luggage compartment light (Coupe models) ............. 2-42

Trunk light (Roadster models).......................................... 2-42

HomeLink

Universal Transceiver (if so equipped).... 2-43

Programming HomeLink

........................................... 2-43

Programming HomeLink

for Canadian

customers ....................................................................... 2-45

Operating the HomeLink

Universal

Transceiver ..................................................................... 2-45

Programming trouble-diagnosis ............................... 2-45

Clearing the programmed information .................... 2-45

Reprogramming a single HomeLink

button ........ 2-45

If your vehicle is stolen ............................................... 2-46

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

1. Headlight/turn signal switch

2. Instrument brightness control switch

3. Steering wheel switch for audio control (if so

equipped) or switch for Bluetooth

Hands-

Free Phone System (if so equipped)

4. Driver supplemental air bag/Horn

5. Meters/gauges

6. Cruise control main/set switch

(if so equipped)

7. Trip computer mode/setting switch

8. Wiper/washer switch

9. Center ventilator

10. Passenger supplemental air bag

11. Side ventilator

12. Soft top operating switch (for Roadster

models)

13. VDC (Vehicle dynamic control) OFF switch

(if so equipped) or TCS (Traction control

system) OFF switch (if so equipped)

14. Fuel-filler door opener switch

15. Hood lock release handle

16. Fuse box

17. Tilting steering wheel lock lever

18. Ignition switch/steering lock

19. Navigation system display* or Instrument

pocket

20. Audio system/Clock

21. Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch

22. Hazard warning flasher switch

23. Cup holder

24. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

25. Heater/air conditioner control

26. Power outlet

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

SIC3266

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Combination meter:

1. Warning/Indicator lights

2. Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

3. Tachometer

4. Speedometer

5. Instrument brightness control switch

(See “Headlight and turn signal switch” later

in this section.)

6. Fuel gauge

7. Engine coolant temperature gauge

8. Automatic transmission position indicator or

Manual transmission shift up indicator

(See “Driving the vehicle” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section.)

9. Reset knob for trip odometer

10. Odometer (Total/Twin trip)

11. Trip computer setting switch

(See “Trip computer” later in this section.)

12. Trip computer mode switch

(See “Trip computer” later in this section.)

SIC3329

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Triple meter:

1. Trip computer

2. Engine oil pressure gauge

3. Volt meter

쎻

Speedometer

쎻

Odometer

쎻

Twin trip odometer

쎻

Reset knob for trip odometer

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in

miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour

(km/h).

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer are displayed

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the

vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of

individual trips.

SIC1948 SIC1949A

2-4 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Changing the display:

Pushing the reset knob changes the display as

follows:

TRIP A → TRIP B → TRIP A

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the reset knob for more than 1 second

resets the trip odometer to zero.

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-

lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into

the red zone

쎻

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce

engine speed. Operating the engine in

the red zone may cause serious engine

damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tem-

perature.

The engine coolant temperature is within the

normal range

쎻

when the gauge needle points

within the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature will vary with the

outside air temperature and driving conditions.

SIC3328 SIC2371A

Instruments and controls 2-5

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates a coolant tem-

perature near the hot (H) end of the

normal range, reduce vehicle speed to

decrease the temperature. If the gauge

is over the normal range, stop the ve-

hicle as soon as safely possible. If the

engine is overheated, continued opera-

tion of the vehicle may seriously dam-

age the engine. See “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “6. In case of emer-

gency” section for immediate action re-

quired.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in

the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,

turning, acceleration, or going up or down hill.

The gauge needle is designed to move to the E

(Empty) position when the ignition key is turned

to the OFF position.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-

ters the E (Empty) position.

The low fuel warning light comes on when

the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon

as it is convenient, preferably before the

gauge reaches the E position. There will be

a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the

fuel gauge needle reaches the E position.

The

indicates that the fuel-filler door is

located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

쐌 If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

malfunction indicator light

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon

as possible. After a few driving trips,

the

light should turn off. If the

light remains on after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected by a

NISSAN dealer.

쐌 For additional information, see “Mal-

function indicator light (MIL)” later in

this section.

SIC2556

2-6 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys-

tem oil pressure while the engine is running.

When the engine speed is high, the engine oil

pressure is also high. When it is low, the gauge

indicates the low oil pressure.

CAUTION

쐌 This gauge is not designed to indi-

cate low engine oil level. Use the

dipstick to check the oil level. (See

“Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section.)

쐌 If the gauge needle does not move

with the proper amount of engine oil,

have the vehicle checked by a

NISSAN dealer. Continued vehicle

operation in such a condition could

cause serious damage to the engine.

SIC1954A

Type A

SIC1953A

Type B

Instruments and controls 2-7

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

VOLT METER

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position, the volt meter indicates the battery

voltage; while the engine is running, it indicates

the alternator voltage of 11 - 15 volts (normal

range

쎻

). However, while cranking the engine,

the volts drop below the normal range.

If the needle is not in the normal range

쎻

while

the engine is running, it may indicate that the

charging system is not functioning properly.

Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

TRIP COMPUTER

The display of the trip computer is situated in the

triple meter. When the ignition switch is turned

to ON, the display scrolls all the modes of the

trip computer and then shows the mode chosen

before the ignition switch is turned OFF.

Switches for the trip computer are located on

the side of the combination meter panel. To

operate the trip computer, push the side of the

switches as shown above.

쎻

: Trip computer mode switch

쎻

: Trip computer setting switch

When the ignition switch is turned to ON, modes

of the trip computer can be selected by pushing

the trip computer mode switch

쎻

Each time the mode switch

쎻

is pushed, the

display will change as follows:

Speed indicator → Outside air temperature

(ICY) → Distance to empty (dte) → Average fuel

SIC1955 SIC3357 SIC2997

2-8 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

consumption and speed → Elapsed time and

trip odometer → Stopwatch → Up-shift indica-

tor setting (for M/T models) → Speed indicator

Speed indicator (mph or km/h)

The vehicle speed is displayed in MPH or km/h

while driving.

The speed indicator in the trip computer

indicates the reference speed. The actual

speed indicated by the speedometer (com-

bination meter) may differ from the one in

the trip computer.

Outside air temperature

(ICY—°For°C)

The outside air temperature is displayed in °F or

°C in the range of −22 to 131°F (−30 to 55°C).

The outside air temperature mode includes a low

temperature warning feature: below 37°F (3°C),

the outside air temperature mode is automati-

cally selected and the ICY indicator will illumi-

nate in order to draw the driver’s attention. Push

the mode switch

쎻

if you wish to return to the

mode that was selected before the warning

occurred. The ICY indicator will continue blink-

ing as long as the temperature remains below

39°F (4°C).

The ambient temperature sensor is located in

front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected

by road or engine heat, wind directions and

other driving conditions. The display may differ

from the actual ambient temperature or the

temperature displayed on various signs or bill-

boards.

Distance to empty (dte — mls or km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you

with an estimation of the distance that can be

driven before refueling. The dte is constantly

being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in

the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The dte mode includes a low range warning

feature: when the fuel level is low, the dte mode

is automatically selected and the digits blink in

order to draw the driver’s attention. Press the

mode switch

쎻

if you wish to return to the mode

that was selected before the warning occurred.

The dte indicator will remain blinking until the

vehicle is refueled.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte

display will change to (----).

NOTE:

쐌 If the amount of fuel added while the

ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-

play just before the ignition switch is

turned OFF may continue to be dis-

played.

쐌 When driving uphill or rounding curves,

the fuel in the tank shifts, which may

momentarily change the display.

Average fuel consumption

(mpg or l (liter)/100 km) and speed

(av. mph or av. km/h)

Fuel consumption:

The average fuel consumption mode shows the

average fuel consumption since the last reset.

Resetting is done by pushing the trip computer

setting switch

쎻

for more than approximately 1

second. (The average speed is also reset at the

same time.)

The display is updated every 30 seconds. At

about the first 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset,

the display shows (----).

Speed:

The average speed mode shows the average

vehicle speed since the last reset. Resetting is

done by pushing the setting switch

쎻

for more

than approximately 1 second. (The average fuel

consumption is also reset at the same time.)

The display is updated every 30 seconds. The

Instruments and controls 2-9

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows

(----).

Elapsed time (h:m:s) and trip

odometer (mls or km)

Elapsed time:

The elapsed time mode shows the time since the

last reset. The displayed time can be reset by

pushing the trip computer setting switch

쎻

for

more than approximately 1 second. (The trip

odometer is also reset at the same time.)

Trip odometer:

The trip odometer mode shows the total dis-

tance the vehicle has been driven since the last

reset. Resetting is done by pushing the setting

switch

쎻

for more than approximately 1 second.

(The elapsed time is also reset at the same time.)

Stopwatch (h:m:s)

You can use the trip computer as a stopwatch.

Each time the trip computer setting switch

쎻

pushed, the stopwatch will be operated as fol-

lows:

After 100 hours, the time will start from the reset

display again.

Even if the display is switched to the other mode

while the time is starting, the stopwatch contin-

ues to advance until you stop the time in the

stopwatch mode. When the ignition switch is

turned to the OFF position, the time is reset.

Up-shift indicator setting (rpm) (for

manual transmission models)

The up-shift indicator setting mode is used to

set the desired engine speed (rpm) for the

up-shift indicator (situated in the tachometer) to

illuminate. When the engine speed approaches

or reaches the set figure, the up-shift indicator

will flash or illuminate to show the driver the

timing for shifting into a higher gear. See “Driving

the vehicle” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section for the use of the up-shift indicator.

When the up-shift indicator setting mode is

selected, the rpm indicator blinks and the engine

speed currently set is displayed. (The initial

factory setting is 7,500 rpm.) The figure can be

changed between 2,000 and 9,000 rpm by

pushing trip computer setting switch

쎻

. Press-

ing the switch for less than approximately 1

second will add the figure by 100 rpm. If pushing

for more than approximately 1 second, the figure

will increase by 500 rpm.

If the battery cable is disconnected, the set

engine speed will be returned to the initial figure

(7,500 rpm).

Display priority

If a low outside air temperature warning,

low dte (distance to empty) range warning

and low tire pressure warning occur simul-

taneously, other display modes switch au-

tomatically to the outside air temperature

display.

When trip computer mode switch

쎻

pressed, the display switches to the mode

chosen before the warning display, but the

ICY indicator will continue blinking.

2-10 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light

Low washer fluid warning light High beam indicator light (Blue)

Automatic transmission check warning

light (A/T models)

Seat belt warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Slip indicator light

Charge warning light

Automatic transmission position indicator

light (A/T models)

Traction Control System (TCS) off indica-

tor light (if so equipped)

Door open warning light

Cruise main switch indicator light

(if so equipped)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indi-

cator light (if so equipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light

Cruise set switch indicator light

(if so equipped)

Soft top indicator light (Roadster models)

Low tire pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

CHECKING BULBS

Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition key

to ON without starting the engine. The following

lights will come on:

, or , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then go

off:

, or , , , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a

burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the elec-

trical system. Have the system repaired

promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS

or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates

the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the

engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate

the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the

system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock

function is turned off. The brake system then

operates normally, but without anti-lock assis-

tance. See “Brake system” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Instruments and controls 2-11

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Automatic transmission check

warning light (A/T models)

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position, the automatic transmission check

warning light comes on and then turns off. This

indicates that the automatic transmission system

is operational.

If the light comes on while the engine is running

or while driving, it may indicate that the auto-

matic transmission system is not functioning

properly. Have a NISSAN dealer check and

repair the transmission.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake

and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator:

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the light comes on when the parking brake is

applied.

Low brake fluid warning light:

The light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the

light comes on while the engine is running with

the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle

and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as

necessary. See “Brake and clutch fluid” in the

“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

WARNING

쐌 Your brake system may not be work-

ing properly if the warning light is on.

Driving could be dangerous. If you

judge it to be safe, drive carefully to

the nearest service station for re-

pairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle

towed because driving it could be

dangerous.

쐌 Pressing the brake pedal with the

engine stopped and/or a low brake

fluid level may increase your stop-

ping distance and braking will re-

quire greater pedal effort as well as

pedal travel.

쐌 If the brake fluid level is below the

MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

warning system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

indicator:

When the parking brake is released and the

brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake

warning light and the ABS warning light illumi-

nate, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning

properly. Have the brake system checked by a

NISSAN dealer. See “Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light” earlier in this section.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is running,

it may indicate that the charging system is not

functioning properly. Turn the engine off and

check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose,

broken, missing or if the light remains on, see a

NISSAN dealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the belt is

loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors

and/or rear hatch are not closed securely while

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

2-12 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Engine oil pressure warning

light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the

light flickers or comes on during normal driving,

pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine

immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other

authorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is not

designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the

dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine

oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil

pressure warning light on could cause

serious damage to the engine almost

immediately. Turn off the engine as

soon as it is safe to do so.

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire

pressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low

tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not

functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light

illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pres-

sure, the warning light will illuminate.

When the low tire pressure warning light illumi-

nates, you should stop and adjust the tire pres-

sure to the recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.

The low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pressure is

adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recom-

mended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at

speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the

TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning

light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire

pressure.

For additional information, see “Tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section and in the “6. In case of

emergency” section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low

tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is

turned ON. The light will remain on after the 1

minute. Have the system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

For additional information, see “Tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section.

WARNING

쐌 If the light does not illuminate with

the ignition switch turned ON, have

the vehicle checked by a NISSAN

dealer as soon as possible.

쐌 If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location

and stop the vehicle as soon as pos-

sible. Driving with under-inflated

tires may permanently damage the

tires and increase the likelihood of

tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an acci-

dent and could result in serious per-

sonal injury. Check the tire pressure

for all four tires. Adjust the tire pres-

Instruments and controls 2-13

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

sure to the recommended COLD tire

pressure shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label to turn the

low tire pressure warning light OFF.

If the light stays on after adjusting

the tire pressure and driving over 16

MPH (25 km/h), have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer. If you

have a flat tire, replace it with a spare

tire as soon as possible.

쐌 When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will remain

on after 1 minute. Contact your

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible

for tire replacement and/or system

resetting.

쐌 Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could af-

fect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

CAUTION

쐌 The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure

to check the tire pressure regularly.

쐌 If the vehicle is being driven at

speeds of less than 16 MPH (25

km/h), the TPMS may not operate

correctly.

쐌 Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the front and rear.

Low washer fluid warning light

This light comes on when the washer fluid is at a

low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. See

“Window washer fluid” in the “8. Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section.

Seat belt warning light

The seat belt warning light and chime remind you

to fasten seat belts. The light illuminates when-

ever the ignition key is turned to ON, and will

remain illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is

fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if

the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened

when the front passenger’s seat is occupied. For

5 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the system does not activate the warn-

ing light for the front passenger.

See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system” section

for precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warning

light

After turning the ignition key to the ON position,

the supplemental air bag warning light will illu-

minate. The supplemental air bag warning light

will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag (if so equipped) and curtain

air bag (if so equipped), and pretensioner sys-

tems need servicing and your vehicle must be

taken to a NISSAN dealer.

쐌 The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

쐌 The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

쐌 The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

2-14 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental

restraint system (air bag system) and/or the

pretensioners may not function properly. For

additional information, see “Supplemental re-

straint system” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system” sec-

tion.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as

soon as possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Automatic transmission

position indicator light (A/T

models)

When the ignition key is turned to the ON

position, the indicator in the tachometer shows

the automatic transmission selector lever posi-

tion. See “Driving the vehicle” (automatic trans-

mission) in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

Cruise main switch indicator

light (if so equipped)

The light comes on when the cruise control main

switch is pushed. The light goes out when the

main switch is pushed again. When the cruise

main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise

control system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicator

light (if so equipped)

The light comes on while the vehicle speed is

controlled by the cruise control system. If the

light blinks while the engine is running, it may

indicate the cruise control system is not func-

tioning properly. Have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

Front passenger air bag status

light

The front passenger air bag status light

(

) will be lit and the passenger front air bag

will be OFF depending on how the front passen-

ger seat is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light opera-

tion, see “NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System” in

the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-

mental restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light

(Blue)

This light comes on when the headlight high

beam is on and goes out when the low beam is

selected.

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on

steady or blinks while the engine is running, it

may indicate a potential emission control mal-

function.

The malfunction indicator light may also come on

steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or

if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure

the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly,

and that the vehicle has at least 3 US gallons (14

liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the

light should

turn off if no other potential emission control

system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20

seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when

the engine is not running, it indicates that the

vehicle is not ready for an emission control

system inspection/maintenance test. See

“Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)

test” in the “9. Technical and consumer informa-

Instruments and controls 2-15

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

tion” section of this manual.

Operation

The malfunction indicator light will come on in

one of two ways:

쐌 Malfunction indicator light on steady — An

emission control system malfunction has

been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If the

fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or

install the cap and continue to drive the

vehicle. The

light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the

light does not

turn off after a few driving trips, have the

vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You

do not need to have your vehicle towed to the

dealer.

쐌 Malfunction indicator light blinking — An en-

gine misfire has been detected which may

damage the emission control system. To re-

duce or avoid emission control system dam-

age:

a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH

(72 km/h).

b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

c) Avoid steep uphill grades.

d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may stop

blinking and come on steady.

Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN

dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle

towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without

having the emission control system

checked and repaired as necessary

could lead to poor driveability, reduced

fuel economy, and possible damage to

the emission control system.

Slip indicator light

The light will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system or the Traction Control

System (TCS) is operating, thus alerting the

driver to the fact that the road surface is slippery

and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.

This light also comes on when the ignition switch

is turned to the ON position. The light will turn off

if the VDC or TCS is operational.

Traction Control System (TCS)

off indicator light (if so

equipped)

The light comes on when the Traction Control

System (TCS) off switch is pushed to OFF. This

indicates the TCS is not operating.

This light also comes on when the ignition switch

is turned to the ON position. The light will turn off

if the TCS is operational.

When the TCS off indicator light and slip indi-

cator light come on with the TCS turned on, this

light alerts the driver to the fact that the system’s

fail-safe mode is operating, that is the TCS may

not be functioning properly. Have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer. If a malfunction

occurs in the system, the traction control func-

tion will be canceled but the vehicle is still

driveable. For additional information, see “Trac-

tion Control System (TCS)” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) off indicator light (if so

equipped)

The light comes on when the Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) off switch is pushed to OFF. This

indicates the VDC system and Traction Control

System (TCS) are not operating.

2-16 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

This light also comes on when the ignition switch

is turned to the ON position. The light will turn off

if the VDC system is operational.

When the VDC off indicator light and slip indi-

cator light come on with the VDC system turned

on, this light alerts the driver to the fact that the

system’s fail-safe mode is operating, that is the

VDC system may not be functioning properly.

Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the VDC

system function will be canceled but the vehicle

is still driveable. For additional information, see

“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Soft top indicator light

(Roadster models)

This light illuminates when the soft top is being

operated or it is stopped before reaching a full

open/close state. When the top is fully opened,

the light will turn off. When the top is fully closed,

the light will flash.

The soft top can be moved with the soft top

operating switch only under all of the following

conditions:

쐌 When the vehicle is stopped.

쐌 When the foot brake pedal is depressed.

쐌 When the ignition switch is ON.

CAUTION

Operate the soft top with the engine

running to prevent a discharged battery.

When the soft top is in motion, and any of the

above conditions are discontinued or the pas-

senger power seat switches (on the cushion or

the seatback) are operated, the top will stop

moving. Remove your hand from the operating

switch, and push it again under the above

conditions until the top is fully opened or closed.

The soft top indicator light will turn off when the

top open operation is completely finished. When

closing the top, the light, which is illuminated,

will begin to flash when the top close operation

is completely finished. Securely engage the top

to the vehicle by operating the top latch lever.

The light will turn off.

If the soft top indicator light flashes with the

ignition switch ON (whether the top is operated

or not, and when the top is engaged), it may

indicate the electric soft top control unit is not

functioning properly. Have your vehicle checked

by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

For more details about the electric soft top

operation, see “Soft top” in the “3. Pre-driving

checks and adjustments” section.

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

The light flashes when the turn signal switch

lever or hazard switch is turned on.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Key reminder chime

The chime will sound if the driver’s side door is

opened while the key is left in the ignition switch

(ignition switch is turned off). Remove the key

and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

The chime will sound when the driver’s door is

opened with the headlight switch on unless the

key is in the ignition switch. Make sure to turn the

light switch off when you leave the vehicle.

Seat belt warning chime

The chime will sound for about 6 seconds unless

the driver’s seat belt is securely fastened.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-

ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it

will make a high pitched scraping sound when

the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake

pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as

Instruments and controls 2-17

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Your vehicle has two types of security systems,

as follows:

쐌 Vehicle Security System

쐌 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

The security condition will be shown by the

security indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and

audible alarm signals if someone opens the

doors or rear hatch/trunk lid when the system is

armed. It is not, however, a motion detection

type system that activates when a vehicle is

moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot

prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior

or exterior vehicle components in all situations.

Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a

brief period. Never leave your keys in the vehicle,

and always lock the vehicle when unattended.

Be aware of your surroundings, and park in

secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection,

such as component locks, identification markers,

and tracking systems, are available at auto sup-

ply stores and specialty shops. A NISSAN dealer

may also offer such equipment. Check with your

insurance company to see if you may be eligible

for discounts for various theft protection fea-

tures.

SIC2132

SECURITY SYSTEMS

2-18 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Security indicator light

This light 쎻

blinks whenever the ignition switch

is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This is

normal.

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows.

The system can be activated even if the

windows are open.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close and lock all doors and rear hatch/trunk

lid.

Lock all doors by using the key or the keyfob.

When using the keyfob, the hazard indicators

flash twice to indicate all doors are locked.

4. Confirm that the security indicator light

comes on. The security indicator light glows

for about 30 seconds and then blinks. The

system is now activated. If, during this 30

second time period, the door is unlocked by

the key or the keyfob, or the ignition key is

turned to ACC or ON, the system will not

activate.

Even when the driver and/or passengers

are in the vehicle, the system will activate

with all doors and rear hatch/trunk lid

locked and ignition key off. Turn the igni-

tion key to ACC to turn the system off.

Vehicle security system activation

The security system will give the following alarm:

쐌 The headlights blink and the horn sounds

intermittently.

쐌 The alarm automatically turns off after ap-

proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm

reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with

again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking

a door with the key, or by pushing the

UNLOCK

button on the keyfob.

The alarm is activated by:

쐌 Opening the door without using the key or

keyfob.

쐌 Opening the rear hatch or the trunk lid with-

out using the keyfob.

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm will stop only by unlocking a door with

the key, or by pushing the UNLOCK

but-

ton on keyfob. The alarm will not stop if the

ignition key is turned to ACC or ON.

If the system does not operate as de-

scribed above, have it checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the

registered key.

If the engine fails to start using the registered key

(for example, when interference is caused by

another registered key, an automated toll road

device or automated payment device on the key

ring), restart the engine using the following

procedures:

SIC1699A

Instruments and controls 2-19

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position and wait approximately 10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

If this procedure allows the engine to start,

NISSAN recommends placing the registered

key on a separate key ring to avoid interfer-

ence from other devices.

Statement related to section 15 of FCC

rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem (CONT ASSY-BCM, ANT ASSY-

IMMOBILISER)

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-

ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-

PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-

SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD

VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-

ATE THE EQUIPMENT.

Security indicator light

This light 쎻

blinks whenever the ignition switch

is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This

function indicates the security system equipped

on the vehicle is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is

malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the

engine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer

for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

service as soon as possible. Bring all reg-

istered keys that you have when visiting a

SIC1699A

2-20 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

NISSAN dealer for service.

The windshield wiper and washer operates

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the

following speed:

쎻

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation

can be adjusted by turning the knob toward

쎻

(Slower) or 쎻

(Faster).

쎻

Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

쎻

High (HI) — continuous high speed operation

Push the lever up

쎻

to have one sweep

operation (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you

쎻

to operate the

washer. Then the wiper will also operate several

times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer so-

lution may freeze on the windshield and

obscure your vision which may lead to

an accident. Warm the windshield with

the defroster before you wash the wind-

shield.

CAUTION

쐌 Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

쐌 Do not operate the washer if the

reservoir tank is empty.

쐌 Do not fill the window washer reser-

voir tank with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl

alcohol based washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the win-

dow washer reservoir tank.

SIC2998

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND

WASHER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-21

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

쐌 Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s rec-

ommended levels before pouring the

fluid into the window washer reser-

voir tank. Do not use the window

washer reservoir tank to mix the

washer fluid concentrate and water.

The rear window wiper and washer operate

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position

to operate the wiper.

쎻

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation

(not adjustable)

쎻

Low (ON) — continuous low speed operation

Push the switch forward

쎻

to operate the

washer. Then the wiper will also operate several

times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer so-

lution may freeze on the rear window

and obscure your vision. Warm the rear

window with the defroster before you

wash the rear window.

CAUTION

쐌 If the rear window wiper operation is

interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper

may stop moving to protect its motor.

If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to

OFF and remove the snow or ice on

and around the wiper arms. After

about 1 minute, turn the switch ON

again to operate the wiper.

쐌 Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

쐌 Do not operate the washer if the

reservoir tank is empty.

쐌 Do not fill the window washer reser-

SIC3297

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND

WASHER SWITCH (Coupe

models)

2-22 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

voir tank with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl

alcohol based washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the win-

dow washer reservoir tank.

쐌 Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s rec-

ommended levels before pouring the

fluid into the window washer reser-

voir tank. Do not use the window

washer reservoir tank to mix the

washer fluid concentrate and water.

To defog/defrost the rear window glass and

outside mirrors, start the engine and push the

switch on. The indicator light

쎻

will come on.

Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.

It will automatically turn off in approximately 15

minutes.

CAUTION

쐌 When cleaning the inner side of the

rear window, be careful not to scratch

or damage the rear window de-

froster.

쐌 Do not use the rear window defroster

switch while the soft top is being

operated or fully opened. The heat

may damage the top material and/or

components. (for Roadster models)

SIC3000

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-23

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

XENON HEADLIGHTS

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

쐌 When xenon headlights are on, they

produce a high voltage. To prevent an

electric shock, never attempt to

modify or disassemble. Always have

your xenon headlights replaced at a

NISSAN dealer.

쐌 Xenon headlights provide consider-

ably more light than conventional

headlights. If they are not correctly

aimed, they might temporarily blind

an oncoming driver or the driver

ahead of you and cause a serious

accident. If headlights are not aimed

correctly, immediately take your ve-

hicle to a NISSAN dealer and have

the headlights adjusted correctly.

When the xenon headlight is initially turned on,

its brightness or color varies slightly. However,

the color and brightness will soon stabilize.

쐌 The life of xenon headlights will be

shortened by frequent on-off operation.

It is generally desirable not to turn off

the headlights for short intervals (for

example, when the vehicle stops at a

traffic signal). Even when the daytime

running lights are active (Canada only),

the xenon headlights do not turn on.

This way the life of the xenon headlights

is not reduced.

쐌 If the xenon headlight bulb is close to

burning out, the brightness will drasti-

cally decrease, the light will start blink-

ing, or the color of the light will become

reddish. If one or more of the above

signs appear, contact a NISSAN dealer.

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

쎻

Turn the switch to the position:

The front park, side marker, tail, license plate

and instrument lights will come on.

쎻

Turn the switch to the position:

Headlights will come on and all the other

lights remain on.

SIC3291

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

2-24 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

Headlight beam select

쎻

To select the high beam, push the lever

forward. The high beam lights come on and

the high beam indicator light

illumi-

nates.

쎻

Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

쎻

Pulling the lever toward you will flash the

headlight high beam.

Battery saver system

쐌 When the headlight switch is in the or

position while the ignition switch is in

the ON position, the lights will automatically

turn off 5 minutes after the ignition switch has

been turned to the OFF position.

쐌 After the headlights automatically turn off with

the headlight switch in the

or po-

sition, the headlights will illuminate again for 5

minutes if the headlight switch is turned to

the OFF position and then turned to the

or position.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature

automatically turns off the headlights

after a period of time, you should turn

the headlight switch to the OFF position

when the engine is not running to avoid

discharging the vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM

(Canada only)

The headlights (low beam) automatically illumi-

nate when the engine is started with the parking

brake released. The daytime running lights op-

erate with the headlight switch in the OFF

position or in the

position.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine

is started, the daytime running lights do not

SIC3315

Instruments and controls 2-25

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate

once the parking brake is released. The daytime

running lights will remain on until the ignition

switch is turned off.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

쎻

Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the turning

direction. When the turn is completed, the turn

signals cancel automatically.

쎻

Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or

down to the point where lights begin flashing.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

The instrument brightness control operates

when the light switch is in the

position and the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

To adjust the brightness of instrument panel

lights, press the control switches located on the

left side of the meter panel. Pressing the upper

switch

쎻

will brighten the lights. The lower

switch

쎻

will dim the lights. Repeatedly press-

ing the lower switch will turn the lights off.

SIC3316 SIC3001

2-26 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Push the switch (located on the front part of the

center console) on to warn other drivers when

you must stop or park under emergency condi-

tions. All turn signal lights will flash.

Some state or provincial laws may prohibit

the use of the hazard warning flasher

switch while driving.

WARNING

쐌 If stopping for an emergency, be sure

to move the vehicle well off the road.

쐌 Do not use the hazard warning flash-

ers while moving on the highway un-

less unusual circumstances force you

to drive so slowly that your vehicle

might become a hazard to other traf-

fic.

쐌 Turn signals do not work when the

hazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flasher will operate with the ignition switch in

any position.

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of

the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system. Tam-

pering with the supplemental front air

bag system may result in serious per-

sonal injury.

SIC2475 SIC2195

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH

HORN

Instruments and controls 2-27

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

The seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The

switches are located on the center console.

1. Start the engine.

2. Select heat range.

쎻

For high heat, push the (High) side

of the switch.

쎻

For low heat, push the (Low) side of

the switch.

쎻

For no heat, the switch has a center OFF

position between low and high.

The indicator light

쎻

in the switch will

illuminate when low or high is selected.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,

automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as

the switch is on.

3. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or

before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn

the switch to the OFF position

쎻

An optional ventilated net seat has this built-in

heater only in the seat cushion part, not in the

seatback.

CAUTION

쐌 The battery could be discharged if

the seat heater is operated while the

engine is not running.

쐌 Do not use the seat heater for ex-

tended periods or when no one is

using the seat.

쐌 Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates heat, such as a blan-

ket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Other-

wise, the seat may become over-

heated.

쐌 Do not place anything hard or heavy

on the seat or pierce it with a pin or

similar object. This may result in

damage to the heater.

쐌 Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with

a dry cloth.

쐌 When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any

similar materials.

쐌 If any abnormalities are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn

the switch off and have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

SIC3002

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

2-28 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most

driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC

system reduces the engine output to reduce

wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced

even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor.

If maximum engine power is needed to free a

stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF

switch (located on the lower side of the instru-

ment panel). The

indicator light will come

on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the

engine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “5. Start-

ing and driving” section.

The vehicle should be driven with the Traction

Control System (TCS) on for most driving con-

ditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the TCS

reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin.

The engine speed will be reduced even if the

accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum

engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,

turn the TCS off.

To turn off the TCS, push the TCS OFF switch

(located on the lower side of the instrument

panel). The

indicator light will come on.

Push it again or restart the engine to turn the

system back on.

SIC1881 SIC1967

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL

(VDC) OFF SWITCH (if so

equipped)

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM

(TCS) OFF SWITCH (if so

equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-29

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

See “Traction Control System (TCS)” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.

The digital clock (in the audio unit) displays time

when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

If the battery cable is disconnected, the

clock will reset its time and the correct

time will not be indicated. Readjust the

time.

ADJUSTING THE TIME

Adjust the time in the following steps:

1. Switch the display to the clock adjusting

mode.

Type A (audio with 1 CD player):

Push and hold the DISP (Clock) button

쎻

until the clock display starts to flash.

Type B (audio with 6 CD changer):

Push and hold the RPT button

쎻

until the

clock display starts to flash.

2. Push the SEEK/TRACK button

쎻

( ,

) to adjust the hour. Push the TUNE

button

쎻

( , ) to adjust the

SIC3003

CLOCK

2-30 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

minute. Pushing the or side will

advance the time and the

or side

will turn back the time.

3. Push the DISP button

쎻

(Type A), or RPT

쎻

button (Type B) to finish the adjustment.

Resetting

Type A (audio with 1 CD player):

Push the DISP

쎻

and TUNE 쎻

buttons.

Type B (audio with 6 CD changer):

Push the RPT

쎻

and TUNE 쎻

buttons.

The time will be set to a time signal.

For example, if these buttons are pushed while

the time is between 8:00 and 8:29, the display

will be reset to 8:00. If pushed while it is

between 8:30 and 8:59, the display will be reset

to 9:00. At the same time the display will return

to the previous audio mode.

The power outlet is for powering electrical ac-

cessories such as cellular telephones.

CAUTION

쐌 The outlet and plug may be hot dur-

ing or immediately after use.

쐌 This power outlet is not designed for

use with a cigarette lighter unit.

쐌 Do not use accessories that exceed a

combined power draw of 12 volt,

120W (10A) for both the front and

rear power outlets. Do not use

double adapters or more than one

accessory with a single power outlet.

쐌 Use power outlet with the engine

running to avoid discharging the ve-

hicle battery.

쐌 Avoid using power outlets when the

air conditioner, headlights or rear

window defroster is on.

쐌 Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure to turn off the power

switch of electrical accessory being

SIC2258

Front

SIC1968

Rear

POWER OUTLET

Instruments and controls 2-31

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

used or the ACC power of the vehicle.

쐌 Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug

may overheat or the internal tem-

perature fuse may open.

쐌 Do not allow water to contact the

outlet. When not in use, be sure to

close the lid.

INSTRUMENT POCKET (except for

navigation system equipped models)

To open the lid, push the knob up

쎻

To close, pull the lid down

쎻

WARNING

Keep the pocket lid closed while driving

to help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

SUNGLASSES HOLDER (Coupe

models)

The sunglasses holder can be opened by push-

ing the button

쎻

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed

while driving to prevent an accident.

SIC3004 SIC2317

STORAGE

2-32 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

CAUTION

쐌 Do not use for anything other than

glasses.

쐌 Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in direct

sunlight. The heat may damage the

sunglasses.

CARGO NET

The net located under the instrument panel

(passenger’s side) can be used to hold small

objects.

The net can be removed when necessary.

WARNING

쐌 Do not place sharp objects in the net.

Such objects may become dangerous

projectiles and cause injury when the

vehicle is moving or if the vehicle is

involved in a collision.

쐌 The cargo restrained in the net must

not exceed 4 lb (2 kg) or the net may

not stay secured.

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

쐌 Avoid abrupt starting and braking

when the cup holder is being used to

prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid

is hot, it can scald you or your pas-

senger.

쐌 Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

SIC3006

Instruments and controls 2-33

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Front

Type A:

To open the cup holder, slide the lid

쎻

Install the partition plate into the slit

쎻

Type B:

Larger containers can be placed in the console

box. Push the button

쎻

to open the console box

lid. The partition

쎻

can be removed.

Soft bottle holder

CAUTION

쐌 Do not use bottle holder for any other

objects that could be thrown about in

the vehicle and possibly injure

people during sudden braking or an

accident.

쐌 Do not use bottle holder for open

liquid containers.

SIC3007 SIC3384 SIC3008

2-34 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

CONSOLE BOX

Pushing the button

쎻

will open the lid slightly,

then pull up the lid manually

쎻

. The center

console box is equipped with a card holder

쎻

The inside tray (cup holder and partitions) can

be removed by pulling it up.

If objects (coins, etc.) fall into the rear section of

the center console box, remove the rear wall

쎻

of the box as shown, and pick up the objects.

CAUTION

Be careful not to pinch your fingers

when removing the rear wall

쎻

REAR FLOOR BOX

The rear floor box is located behind the passen-

ger’s seat.

Fold the passenger’s seatback forward to ac-

cess the rear floor box.

Coupe model: Pull on the lever

쎻

Roadster model: Push the upper portion of the

power seatback tilt switch

쎻

SIC3385 SIC3010 SSS0203

Coupe model

Instruments and controls 2-35

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Return the passenger’s seatback to a locked

position after using the rear floor box.

Coupe model: Pull up on the lever

쎻

and return

the seatback.

Roadster model: Push the lower portion of the

power seatback tilt switch

쎻

The rear floor box may be opened by pulling the

handle. The rear floor box light illuminates when

the box lid is opened with the headlight switch

ON.

When locking

쎻

or unlocking

쎻

the rear floor

box, use the master key.

The rear floor box has additional space under the

bottom plate.

WARNING

Keep rear floor box lid closed while

driving to help prevent injury in an acci-

dent or a sudden stop.

SIC3348

Roadster model

SIC1975A SIC2377

2-36 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

REAR PARCEL BOX

Push the upper part of the lid to open the rear

parcel box. For models without the Navigation

system, two boxes are available.

WARNING

Keep rear parcel box lid closed while

driving to help prevent injury in an acci-

dent or a sudden stop.

STOWING GOLF BAGS

Follow the instructions here to stow golf bags in

the rear cargo space of your vehicle. Normally

two bags can be stowed in the luggage area

(Coupe models) or one bag in the trunk (Road-

ster models).

However, in some cases you may not be able to

stow the above number of golf bags in your

vehicle, depending on their sizes or types.

Coupe models

Normally, two standard golf bags can be stowed

across the strut tower bar in the luggage area as

illustrated (A and B). When stowing a golf bag A

in the rear space, insert the top of the golf bag

SIC1977

SIC2196

Instruments and controls 2-37

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

into left side of the luggage area

쎻

then put the

bag down

쎻

Roadster models

Normally, one standard golf bag C can be

stowed in the trunk. Insert the top of the golf bag

into left side of the trunk

쎻

then put the bag

down

쎻

COAT HOOK (Coupe models)

The hooks are locked above the side windows

as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 2

lb (1 kg) to a single hook.

SIC2237

SIC2378

2-38 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

쐌 Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle

while it is in motion and before clos-

ing the windows. Use the window

lock switch to prevent unexpected

use of the power windows.

쐌 Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-

ingly activate switches or controls

and become trapped in a window.

Unattended children could become

involved in serious accidents.

The power windows operate when the ignition

key is in the ON position and for about 45

seconds, after the ignition key is turned to the

OFF position. If the driver’s door or the front

passenger’s door is opened during this period of

about 45 seconds, power to the windows is

canceled.

The power window switches will be deactivated

during the soft top operation. (Roadster models)

Driver’s side power window switch

1. Driver side window

2. Passenger side window

3. Window lock button

To open or close the window, push down

쎻

pull up

쎻

the switch and hold it. The main

switch (driver side switches) will open or close

all the windows.

Passenger side power window switch

The passenger side switch will open or close

only the corresponding window. To open or

close the window, hold the switch down or up.

Locking passenger’s window

When the lock button 쎻

is pushed in, only the

driver side window can be opened or closed.

Push it in again to cancel.

SIC3286 SIC3287

WINDOWS

Instruments and controls 2-39

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Automatic operation

To fully open or close the window, completely

press or lift the switch and release it; it need not

be held. The window will automatically open or

close all the way. To stop the window, just press

or lift the switch on the opposite side.

Auto reverse function

If the control unit detects something caught in a

window as it moves up, the window will be

immediately lowered.

The auto reverse function can be activated when

a window is closed by automatic operation when

the ignition key is in the ON position or for about

45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the

OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the window

occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., in-

side the vehicle before closing the win-

dow.

Automatic window lowering (Roadster

models)

When the soft top operating switch is pressed,

the power windows will automatically be low-

ered completely. The windows do not rise auto-

matically after the soft top open/close operation

is completed. Use the power window switches

to raise them.

AUTOMATIC ADJUSTING

FUNCTION

CAUTION

When the battery cable is removed from

the battery terminal, do not close either

of the front doors. The automatic win-

dow adjusting function will not work,

and the side roof panel/top side rail

may be damaged.

The power window has an automatic adjusting

function. When the door is being opened, the

window is automatically lowered slightly to avoid

contact between the window and the side roof

panel/top side rail. When the door is closed, the

window is automatically raised slightly.

SIC3288

2-40 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

ROOM LIGHT

The interior light has a two-position switch. (쎻

DOOR,

쎻

: OFF)

When the switch is in the DOOR position, the

light will illuminate when a door is opened.

The light will stay on for about 30 seconds when:

쐌 The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a key

or the power door lock switch while all doors

are closed.

쐌 The driver’s door is opened and then closed

while the key is removed from the ignition

switch.

쐌 The key is removed from the ignition switch

while all doors are closed.

The interior light will turn off while the 30 second

timer is activated, when:

쐌 The driver’s door is locked either with the

keyfob, a key or the power door lock switch.

쐌 The ignition switch is turned ON.

MAP LIGHTS

To turn on the light, push the plastic surface 쎻

of the light. Push it again to turn off the light.

When the map light stays on, it will auto-

matically turn off 30 minutes after the

ignition switch has been turned to the OFF

position. To turn on the light again, turn the

ignition switch to the ON position.

The map and vanity mirror lights will automati-

cally turn off 30 minutes after the latest operation

of the following with the ignition switch in the

ACC or OFF position:

쐌 Opening or closing any door

쐌 Locking or unlocking with the keyfob, a key or

the power door lock switch

쐌 Inserting or removing a key from the ignition

switch

These lights will turn on again when any of the

above operations is performed after the lights

have turned off automatically. (The lights will turn

off 30 minutes after the latest operation of the

above as well.)

CAUTION

쐌 Turn off the lights when you leave the

vehicle.

쐌 Do not use for extended periods of

time with the engine stopped. This

could result in a discharged battery.

SIC1980A

Coupe models

SIC2238

Roadster models

INTERIOR LIGHTS

Instruments and controls 2-41

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when

the cover on the vanity mirror is opened.

When the vanity mirror light stays on, it will

automatically turn off 30 minutes after the

ignition switch has been turned to the OFF

position. To turn on the light again, turn the

ignition switch to the ON position.

The light illuminates when the rear hatch is

opened. When the rear hatch is closed, the light

will go off.

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is

opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light

will go off.

SIC1859

VANITY MIRROR LIGHT

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT

(Coupe models)

TRUNK LIGHT (Roadster models)

2-42 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

The HomeLink

Universal Transceiver provides a

convenient way to consolidate the functions of

up to three individual hand-held transmitters into

one built-in device.

HomeLink

Universal Transceiver:

쐌 Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)

devices such as garage doors, gates, home

and office lighting, entry door locks and se-

curity systems.

쐌 Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No

separate batteries are required. If the vehi-

cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-

nected, HomeLink

will retain all program-

ming.

Once the HomeLink

Universal Transceiver

is programmed, retain the original trans-

mitter for future programming procedures

(for example, new vehicle purchases).

Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed

HomeLink

Universal Transceiver buttons

should be erased for security purposes.

For additional information, refer to “Pro-

gramming HomeLink

” later in this sec-

tion.

WARNING

쐌 Do not use the HomeLink

Universal

Transceiver with any garage door

opener that lacks safety stop and

reverse features as required by fed-

eral safety standards. (These stan-

dards became effective for opener

models manufactured after April 1,

1982). A garage door opener which

cannot detect an object in the path of

a closing garage door and then auto-

matically stop and reverse, does not

meet current federal safety stan-

dards. Using a garage door opener

without these features increases the

risk of serious injury or death.

쐌 During the programming procedure,

your garage door or security gate will

open or close (if the transmitter is

within range). Make sure that people

and objects are clear of the garage

door, gate, etc. that you are

programming.

쐌 Your vehicle’s engine should be

turned off while programming the

HomeLink

Universal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink

To program your HomeLink Transceiver to op-

erate a garage door, gate, or entry door opener,

home or office lighting, you need to be at the

same location as the device. Note: Garage door

openers (manufactured after 1996) have “rolling

code protection”. To program a garage door

opener equipped with “rolling code protection”;

you will need to use a ladder to get up to the

garage door opener motor to be able to access

the training button.

HomeLink UNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-43

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

1. To begin, press and hold the 2 outer

HomeLink

buttons (to clear the memory)

until the indicator light

쎻

blinks (after 20

seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter

1-3in(26-76mm)away from the

HomeLink

surface.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and

hold both the HomeLink

button you want to

program and the hand-held transmitter but-

ton.

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has

been completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator

light on the HomeLink

flashes, changing

from a “slow blink” to a “rapid blink”. When

the indicator light flashes rapidly, both but-

tons may be released. The rapidly flashing

light indicates successful programming. To

activate the garage door or other pro-

grammed device, press and hold the pro-

grammed HomeLink

button - releasing

when the device begins to activate.

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLink

blinks

rapidly for two seconds and then turns solid,

HomeLink

has picked up a “rolling code”

garage door opener signal. You will need to

proceed with the next steps to train the

HomeLink

to complete the programming

which may require a ladder and another

person for convenience.

6. Press and release the training button located

on the garage door opener’s motor to acti-

vate the “training mode”. This button is usu-

ally located near the antenna wire that hangs

down from the motor. If the wire originates

from under a light lens, you will need to

remove the lens to access the training button.

NOTE:

Once you have pressed and released the

training button on the garage door open-

er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you

have 30 seconds in which to perform step

7. Use the help of a second person for

convenience to assist when performing

this step.

7. Quickly within 30 seconds of pressing and

releasing the garage door opener program

button, firmly press and release the

HomeLink

button you’ve just programmed.

SIC3012 SIC3011

2-44 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Press and release the HomeLink

button up

to three times to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLink

button should now be pro-

grammed.

To program the remaining HomeLink

buttons

for additional door or gate openers, follow steps

2-8 only.

NOTE:

Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to

“clear” all previously programmed

HomeLink

buttons.

If you have any questions or are having difficulty

programming your HomeLink

buttons, refer to

the HomeLink

web site at: www.homelink.com

or call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink

FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-

held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2

seconds. To program your hand-held transmitter

to HomeLink

, continue to press and hold the

HomeLink

button (note steps 2 through 4

under “Programming HomeLink

”) while you

press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held

transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator

light flashes rapidly (indicating successful pro-

gramming).

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener,

etc., it is advised to unplug the device

during the “cycling” process to prevent

possible damage to the garage door

opener components.

OPERATING THE HomeLink

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver (once

programmed) may now be used to activate the

garage door, etc. To operate, simply press the

appropriate programmed HomeLink

Universal

Transceiver button. The red indicator light will

illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING

TROUBLE-DIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the

hand-held transmitter information:

쐌 replace the hand-held transmitter batteries

with new batteries.

쐌 position the hand-held transmitter with its

battery area facing away from the HomeLink

surface.

쐌 press and hold both the HomeLink

and

hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-

ruption.

쐌 position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in

(50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink

surface. Hold the transmitter in that position

for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink

is not

programmed within that time, try holding the

transmitter in another position - keeping the

indicator light in view at all times.

If you continue to have programming difficulties,

please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs

Department. The phone numbers are located in

the Foreword of this Owner’s Manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however to

clear all programming, press and hold the two

outside buttons and release when the indicator

light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HomeLink

BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink

Universal Trans-

ceiver button, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

but-

ton. Do not release the button until step 4

has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash

slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-

held transmitter 2 to 5 in (50 to 127 mm)

Instruments and controls 2-45

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

away from the HomeLink

surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter

button.

4. The HomeLink

indicator light will flash, first

slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator

light begins to flash rapidly, release both

buttons.

The HomeLink

Universal Transceiver button

has now been reprogrammed. The new device

can be activated by pushing the HomeLink

button that was just programmed. This proce-

dure will not affect any other programmed

HomeLink

buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the

codes of any non-rolling code device that has

been programmed into HomeLink

. Consult the

Owner’s Manual of each device or call the

manufacturer or dealer of those devices for

additional information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLink

Univer-

sal Transceiver with your new transmitter

information.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part

15. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference and (2) This

device must accept any interference that

may be received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

The transmitter has been tested and com-

plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the device.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D.: CB2V67690

2-46 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

MEMO

Instruments and controls 2-47

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

MEMO

2-48 Instruments and controls

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys ......................................................................................... 3-2

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys................ 3-2

Doors ....................................................................................... 3-3

Locking with key ............................................................. 3-3

Locking with inside lock knob ..................................... 3-4

Locking with power door lock switch ....................... 3-4

Remote keyless entry system ............................................ 3-5

How to use remote keyless entry system ................ 3-5

Hood ........................................................................................ 3-8

Rear hatch (Coupe models) .............................................. 3-9

Opener operation ........................................................... 3-9

Secondary rear hatch release .................................... 3-10

Trunk lid (Roadster models) ............................................ 3-10

Opener operation ......................................................... 3-10

Interior trunk lid release ............................................... 3-11

Secondary trunk lid release ........................................ 3-12

Soft top (Roadster models).............................................. 3-13

Before operating the top ............................................. 3-13

When operating the top .............................................. 3-15

Opening the top ............................................................ 3-18

Closing the top .............................................................. 3-19

If the top does not open or close electrically ........ 3-19

Care of the soft top and the vehicle body.............. 3-22

Fuel-filler door ..................................................................... 3-23

Opener operation ......................................................... 3-23

Fuel-filler cap ................................................................. 3-23

Steering wheel .................................................................... 3-25

Tilt operation .................................................................. 3-25

Sun visors.............................................................................. 3-25

Mirrors ................................................................................... 3-26

Inside mirror .................................................................... 3-26

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror

(if so equipped) ............................................................ 3-26

Outside mirrors ............................................................. 3-27

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

1. Master keys*

2. Valet key*

3. Key number plate

(* With built-in transponder chip)

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe

place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If

you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for

duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN

does not record any key numbers so it is very

important to keep track of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have

lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate

from. If you still have a key, this key can be

duplicated by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the master

or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your

vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in

the key head.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

The valet key cannot be used for the rear floor

box lock. To protect belongings when you leave

a key with someone, give them the valet key only.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not

necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-

cate your existing key. As many as 5 keys can be

used with one vehicle. You should bring all the

registered keys that you have to a NISSAN

dealer for registration. This is because the reg-

istration process will erase the memory of all key

codes previously registered into the NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registra-

tion process, these components will only recog-

nize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immo-

bilizer System during registration. Any key that is

not given to your dealer at the time of registration

will no longer be able to start your vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not allow the NISSAN Vehicle Immo-

bilizer System key, which contains an

electrical transponder, to come in con-

tact with salt water. This could cause the

system to malfunction.

SPA1379D

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

WARNING

쐌 Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat

belts, this provides greater safety in

the event of an accident by helping to

prevent persons from being thrown

from the vehicle. This also helps keep

children and others from uninten-

tionally opening the doors, and will

help keep out intruders.

쐌 Before opening any door, always

look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

쐌 Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-

ingly activate switches or controls.

Unattended children could become

involved in serious accidents.

LOCKING WITH KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock

or unlock all doors including the rear hatch/trunk

lid simultaneously.

쐌 Turning the driver’s door key to the rear of the

vehicle

쎻

will lock all doors including the

rear hatch/trunk lid.

쐌 Turning the driver’s door key one time to the

front of the vehicle

쎻

will unlock the driver’s

door and rear hatch/trunk lid. From that po-

sition, returning the key to neutral (where the

key can only be removed and inserted) and

turning it to the front again within 5 seconds

will unlock the passenger’s door.

Opening and closing windows

Turn the driver’s door key towards the front of

the vehicle (UNLOCK position) and hold for

about 1 second, all door windows will begin to

lower.

To close all door windows, turn the key to the

LOCK position and hold for about 1 second.

To stop opening or closing, turn the key to the

neutral position.

In the event of a hand in the way, or other

obstruction, the auto reverse function will acti-

vate.

SPA1503A

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK

KNOB

Pushing the door inside lock knob to the LOCK

쎻

or UNLOCK

쎻

position will lock or unlock

the corresponding door. (The rear hatch/trunk lid

lock is linked with the driver side door lock.)

To individually lock the doors from the outside

(without a key), move the inside lock knob to the

LOCK position. Then close the door.

When locking the door without a key, be

sure not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH

All doors will be locked when the power door

lock switch is pushed to the LOCK position

쎻

with the driver’s or front passenger’s door open.

Then close the door and all doors will be locked.

When locking the door this way, be certain

not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock, push the power door lock switch to

the UNLOCK position

쎻

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver or front

passenger) is moved to the LOCK position

쎻

with the key in the ignition and any door open, all

doors will lock and unlock automatically. This

helps to prevent the keys from being accidentally

locked inside the vehicle.

SPA2420 SPA2320

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors (including

the rear hatch/trunk lid), release the rear

hatch/trunk lid and activate the panic alarm by

using the keyfob from outside the vehicle.

Before locking the doors, make sure the

key is not left in the vehicle.

The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi-

mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The

effective distance depends upon the conditions

around the vehicle.)

As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one

vehicle. For information concerning the purchase

and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN

dealer.

The keyfob will not function when:

쐌 the battery is discharged,

쐌 the distance between the vehicle and the

keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m).

The panic alarm and the rear hatch/trunk

lid release will not activate when the key is

in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

The following conditions or occurrences

will damage the keyfob.

쐌 Do not allow the keyfob to become

wet.

쐌 Do not drop the keyfob.

쐌 Do not strike the keyfob sharply

against another object.

쐌 Do not place the keyfob for an ex-

tended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that

keyfob. This will prevent the keyfob

from unauthorized use to unlock the

vehicle. For information regarding the

erasing procedure, please contact a

NISSAN dealer.

For information regarding the replacement of a

battery, see “Keyfob battery replacement” in the

“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

쎻

LOCK button

쎻

UNLOCK button

쎻

HATCH/TRUNK button

쎻

PANIC button

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors

1. Remove the ignition key.*1 *2

2. Close all the doors.*3

3. Push the LOCK

button on the keyfob.

SPA1918

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

SYSTEM

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

4. All the doors will lock.

All of the doors will lock when the LOCK

button on the keyfob is pushed even

though a door remains open and/or the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the

horn chirps once.

쐌 When the LOCK

button is pushed with

all doors locked, the hazard indicator flashes

twice and the horn chirps once as a reminder

that the doors are already locked.

*1: Doors lock with the keyfob while a key is in

the ignition switch. However, the panic

alarm and the rear hatch/trunk lid release will

not activate when the key is in the ignition

switch.

*2: Doors lock with the keyfob while the ignition

switch is in the ON position. However, the

hazard indicator and horn will not function.

*3: Doors lock with the keyfob while any door is

open. However, the hazard indicator and

horn will not function.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the UNLOCK button on the key-

fob once.

쐌 The driver’s door and rear hatch/trunk lid

unlock.

쐌 The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors

are completely closed with the ignition switch

in any position except the ON position.

쐌 The interior light turns on and the light timer

activates for 30 seconds when the switch is

in the DOOR position with the ignition switch

in any position except the ON position.

2. Push the UNLOCK

button on the key-

fob again within 5 seconds.

쐌 Passenger’s door unlocks.

쐌 The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors

are completely closed.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within 1

minute of pushing the UNLOCK

button.

쐌 Any door or rear hatch/trunk lid is opened.

쐌 The ignition switch is turned to the ON

position.

The interior light can be turned off without

waiting for 30 seconds by turning the ignition

switch to the ON position or by locking the

doors with the keyfob.

Opening the windows

Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfob

and the driver’s door will unlock.

Continue to push the UNLOCK

button for

3 seconds. All the door windows will start to be

lowered. Keep pushing the UNLOCK

but-

ton until the windows are fully open.

To stop lowering the windows, release the UN-

LOCK

button. To start lowering the win-

dows again, push the UNLOCK

button

again for 3 more seconds.

Releasing the rear hatch/trunk lid

1. Push the HATCH/TRUNK button on

the keyfob for longer than 0.5 second with

the key removed from the ignition switch.

2. The rear hatch (Coupe) or trunk lid (Road-

ster) opens.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the alarm to call attention by

pushing and holding the PANIC

button on

the keyfob for longer than 0.5 second (with

the key removed from the ignition switch).

The theft warning alarm and headlights will stay

on for 30 seconds.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

The panic alarm stops when:

쐌 It has run for 30 seconds, or

쐌 The LOCK

button or the UNLOCK

button is pushed, or

쐌 The PANIC

button or the

HATCH/TRUNK

button is pushed on

the keyfob for longer than 0.5 second.

Setting hazard indicator and horn

mode

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn

mode when you first receive the vehicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the

LOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indi-

cator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.

When the UNLOCK

button is pushed, the

hazard indicator flashes once.

If hazard indicator and horn mode is not neces-

sary, you can switch to hazard indicator only

mode by following the switching procedure.

In hazard indicator only mode, when the LOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indicator

flashes twice. When the UNLOCK

button

is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the

horn operates.

(Switching procedure)

Push the LOCK

and UNLOCK but-

tons on the keyfob simultaneously for more than

2 seconds to switch from one mode to the other.

When pushing the buttons to set hazard indica-

tor only mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3

times.

When pushing the buttons to set hazard indica-

tor and horn mode, the hazard indicator flashes

SPA1260

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

once and the horn chirps once.

1. Pull the hood lock release handle

쎻

located

below the instrument panel; the hood will

then spring up slightly.

2. Raise the lever

쎻

at the front of the hood

with your fingertips and raise the hood.

3. Insert the assist bar into the slot

쎻

in the

front edge of the hood.

4. When closing the hood, reset the assist bar

to its original position, then slowly close the

hood and make sure it locks into place.

Hold the coated part

쎻

when removing or

resetting the support rod. Avoid direct con-

tact with the metal parts, as they may be

hot immediately after the engine has been

stopped.

WARNING

쐌 Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving.

Failure to do so could cause the hood

to fly open and result in an accident.

쐌 If you see steam or smoke coming

from the engine compartment, to

avoid injury do not open the hood.

SPA2313

HOOD

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

WARNING

Do not drive with the rear hatch open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust

gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See

“Precautions when starting and driving”

in the “5. Starting and driving” section

for exhaust gas.

OPENER OPERATION

The rear hatch release switch is located be-

tween the license plate lights.

To open the rear hatch, unlock it with one of the

following operations then push the release

switch:

쐌 Push the UNLOCK

button on the key-

fob once. (Pushing the HATCH/TRUNK

button on the keyfob can open the rear

hatch at once without pushing the release

switch.)

쐌 Insert the key into the door key cylinder and

turn the door key counterclockwise once.

쐌 Push the power door lock switch to the

UNLOCK side.

The rear hatch employs a spring component

which enables you to lift up the hatch by one

hand. Because of this, sometimes the rear hatch

may clatter when the lock is released, but it is not

a malfunction.

To close, push the rear hatch down securely.

The rear hatch release switch is linked with the

driver side door lock. To open the rear hatch,

unlock the driver side door.

SPA1507

REAR HATCH (Coupe models)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

SECONDARY REAR HATCH

RELEASE

The secondary rear hatch release mechanism

allows opening the rear hatch in the event of

discharged battery or emergency.

The release (string) handle is located under the

strut tower bar inside the luggage compartment.

To open the rear hatch from the inside,

firmly pull the release handle to the direc-

tion shown above until the lock releases.

WARNING

쐌 Do not drive with the trunk lid open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust

gases to be drawn into the vehicle.

See “Precautions when starting and

driving” in the “5. Starting and driv-

ing” section for exhaust gas.

쐌 Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously

injured. Keep the car locked, with the

trunk closed when not in use, and

prevent children’s access to car keys.

OPENER OPERATION

The trunk lid release switch is located between

the license plate lights.

To open the trunk lid, unlock it with one of the

following operations then push the release

switch:

쐌 Push the UNLOCK

button on the key-

fob once. (Pushing the HATCH/TRUNK

button on the keyfob can open the

trunk lid at once without pushing the release

switch.)

쐌 Insert the key into the door key cylinder and

turn it counterclockwise once.

SPA1556 SPA1685

TRUNK LID (Roadster models)

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

쐌 Push the power door lock switch to the

UNLOCK side. (After locking the doors with a

keyfob, this switch is not available due to the

security system.)

To close, push the trunk lid down securely.

The trunk lid release switch is linked with the

driver side door lock. To open the trunk lid,

unlock the driver side door.

Cancel switch

When the cancel switch (located inside the rear

floor box) is OFF, the trunk lid cannot be opened

with the release switch. It can be opened only by

pushing the HATCH/TRUNK

button on

the keyfob.

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously in-

jured. Keep the car locked, with the

trunk closed when not in use, and pre-

vent children’s access to car keys.

SPA1686 SPA1687

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

The interior trunk lid release mechanism pro-

vides a means of escape for children and adults

in the event they become locked inside the trunk.

The handle

쎻

is located inside the trunk com-

partment as illustrated.

To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull

the release handle towards you until the

lock releases and push up on the trunk lid.

The release lever is made of a material that

glows in the dark after a brief exposure to

ambient light.

SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE

The secondary trunk lid release mechanism al-

lows opening the trunk lid in the event of dis-

charged battery or emergency.

Remove the cover

쎻

(located inside of the rear

floor box) using a suitable tool

쎻

as shown.

Access the release (string) handle

쎻

To open the trunk lid from the inside, firmly

pull the release handle to the direction

shown above until the lock releases.

SPA1688

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

1. Soft top operating switch

2. Soft top indicator light (on the combination

meter)

3. Top side rail

4. Top latch lever

5. Soft top

6. Top storage lid

7. Trunk lid

8. Rear window

9. Rear section of the top

BEFORE OPERATING THE TOP

The soft top of your 350Z Roadster is electrically

operated. You can fully open or close the top

only by pressing the operating switch (on the

lower side of the instrument panel).

The soft top operating switch must be operated

under all of the following conditions:

쐌 When the foot brake pedal is depressed.

쐌 When the vehicle is stopped.

쐌 When the engine is running.

CAUTION

Always keep the engine running while

operating the soft top. The top will also

operate when the ignition switch is in

the ON position, but run the engine to

prevent a discharged battery.

Be sure to follow the operating instructions, and

all the warnings and cautions in this section.

Improper operation of the top could cause

a system malfunction, damage, or deterio-

ration of the top material and related parts.

WARNING

쐌 Park the vehicle in a safe and level

place and apply the parking brake.

쐌 Make sure the area is clear of ob-

stacles and there is enough clear-

ance over the top (for example, in a

garage or a covered area). More than

approximately 6.6 ft (2 m) from the

ground is required to open or close

the top safely. Otherwise, the top

may damage any objects above it

SPA2339

Interior/exterior view

SOFT TOP (Roadster models)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

while moving. The top operating sys-

tem could also be damaged.

쐌 Do not operate the top in a strong

wind. It could be blown by the wind,

striking someone or damage the top.

쐌 Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out

of the opening while the vehicle is in

motion or while the top is being op-

erated.

쐌 In an accident you could be thrown

from the vehicle with an open top.

Always use seat belts and proper

child restraints.

CAUTION

쐌 Do not operate the top when the

temperature is below 32°F (0°C). This

may result in damage to the top ma-

terial or operating system.

쐌 Remove water drops, snow, ice or

sand from the top, and dry the sur-

face of the top completely before

opening it.

쐌 Do not open the top when it is wet or

damp. This may cause interior water

damage, stains or mildew on the top

material.

쐌 Be sure to turn off the rear window

defroster switch. Never turn it on

while the top is being operated or

fully opened. The heat may damage

the top material.

CAUTION

쐌 Do not place any objects between the

top cloth and the structure. Doing so

could interfere with top operation

and cause damage to the top operat-

ing system or the objects.

쐌 Do not place anything on the top and

the storage lid. Even small items may

interfere with the top operation and

could cause damage to the top or the

SPA1701

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

vehicle body.

쐌 Do not place anything in the top stor-

age area. The top will not fit there

properly, and this could damage the

top and/or the vehicle body.

쐌 Do not sit or place excessive weight

on the top and the storage lid, espe-

cially when the top is being operated.

The top may be damaged.

쐌 Do not drive the vehicle with the top

partially opened. Always make sure

the top is either fully opened or

closed before driving.

쐌 Secure items so that they cannot be

blown from the vehicle while driving

with the top open.

쐌 When a child restraint is installed in

the passenger seat, be sure to turn

the seatback tilt cancel switch (lo-

cated on the passenger seatback) to

the CANCEL position, or the child

restraint may be damaged.

Make sure the trunk lid is securely closed before

operating the top.

WHEN OPERATING THE TOP

WARNING

Keep hands and other parts of the body

away from moving parts such as the top,

storage lid and power windows.

CAUTION

Keep all parts of the top linkage clear of

obstructions, or the top latch may not be

securely locked.

NOTE:

쐌 In case of low battery or low tempera-

ture, the top may temporarily stop mov-

ing during the operation. This functions

to protect the top control mechanism,

and it is not a malfunction.

쐌 If the top is opened and closed repeat-

edly in a short period of time, it may

stop moving to protect the top motor.

Wait for a few minutes before operating

the top again.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Top latch lever

The soft top has three locking points to engage

the front edge of the top to the vehicle body.

Operating the top latch lever enables you to lock

or unlock all three locking points at the same

time.

CAUTION

Before opening the top, be sure to

release the top latch. After closing,

securely engage the top to the vehicle

body.

To release the latch (before opening the

top):

쎻

Push the safety switch 쎻

쎻

The latch lever 쎻

is lowered.

쎻

Swing the lever forward until the latch is

released.

To engage the latch (after closing the top):

Check that the top is in the fully closed position.

쎻

Push the safety switch 쎻

쎻

The latch lever 쎻

is lowered.

쎻

Rotate the lever forward until the front edge

of the top is completely joined to the vehicle

body.

쎻

Rotate the lever toward you and push it up

into the stored position. Make sure the top is

securely engaged to the vehicle body.

The soft top indicator light will flash with the

ignition switch ON when the top is not en-

gaged. See “Soft top indicator light” later in

this section.

When releasing or engaging the top latch,

you may hear the latch operating. This is

normal and not a malfunction.

SPA1690

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Soft top indicator light

The soft top indicator light in the instrument

panel shows the conditions of top operation. The

light illuminates when the soft top is being

operated or if it is stopped before reaching the

fully opened or closed position. When the top is

fully opened, the light will turn off. When the top

is fully closed, the light will flash.

When the soft top is in motion, and any of the

following conditions occur, the top will stop

moving:

쐌 The vehicle is moved.

쐌 The ignition switch is turned to OFF.

쐌 The foot brake pedal is released.

쐌 The passenger power seat switch (on the

cushion or the seatback) is operated.

Remove your hand from the soft top operating

switch, and push the switch again to move the

top to the fully opened or closed position. The

soft top indicator light will turn off when the top

open operation is completely finished. When

closing the top, the light, which is illuminated,

will begin to flash when the top close operation

is completely finished. Securely engage the top

to the vehicle body by operating the top latch

lever. The light will turn off.

If the soft top indicator light flashes with the

ignition switch ON (whether the top is operated

or not, and when the top is engaged), it may

indicate the top operating system is not func-

tioning properly. Have your vehicle checked by a

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Automatic passenger seatback tilt

function

The passenger seatback will automatically tilt

forward when the soft top is operated. This

function is designed to draw your passenger’s

attention to the rear section of the top, which will

come into the passenger compartment from

behind during the top operation. The seatback

will return to the original position when the entire

top operation is completed.

This automatic seatback movement will be

stopped:

쐌 When the passenger seat sliding or reclining

switch (on the seat cushion) is operated.

쐌 When the power seatback tilt switch (on the

seatback) is operated.

쐌 When the seatback tilt cancel switch is

turned to the CANCEL position.

Remove your hand from the soft top operating

switch, and push it again to resume operation.

The passenger seatback will start tilting forward

again from the present position, and the soft top

will start opening or closing. If the top movement

is interrupted at this time, the next time you

resume top operation, the seatback will first tilt

forward from the present position, then the top

will start moving again.

If you need to cancel this function or when a

child restraint is installed in the passenger seat,

push the seatback tilt cancel switch to the

CANCEL position. For the seatback tilt cancel

switch, see “Tilting and reclining passenger’s

seat from driver’s seat” in the “1. Safety —

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restrain sys-

tem” section.

If the seatback tilt cancel switch is in the CAN-

SPA1691

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

CEL position and the passenger seat is occu-

pied, ask the passenger to sit forward when the

top is being opened or closed.

Automatic window lowering

When the soft top operating switch is pressed,

the power windows will automatically be low-

ered completely. The windows do not rise auto-

matically after the top operation is completed.

Use the power window switches to raise them.

OPENING THE TOP

1. Apply the parking brake and move the selec-

tor lever to the P (Park) position (for the

automatic transmission model) or the shift

lever to the N (Neutral) position (for the

manual transmission model).

2. Start the engine.

3. Depress the foot brake pedal.

4. Release the front edge of the top from the

vehicle body with the top latch lever.

5. Push OPEN on the soft top operating switch

and hold it until the top is fully opened.

• The soft top indicator light will illuminate

while the top is in motion. (In about 20

seconds, the opening movement will finish

and the indicator light turns off.)

• Windows will automatically be fully

opened.

• The passenger seatback will automatically

move forward, unless the seatback tilt

cancel switch is in the CANCEL position.

It will return to the original position after

the top operation. (See “Automatic pas-

senger seatback tilt function” shown on

the previous page of this section.)

6. Release the switch when the top is fully

opened. (The indicator light turns off.)

NOTE:

If you release the switch and press it again

while the top is being opened, the top will

slightly move to the closing direction, then

start moving to the opening direction

again. The top is designed to move in this

way. It is not a malfunction.

SPA1692

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

CLOSING THE TOP

1. Apply the parking brake and move the selec-

tor lever to the P (Park) position (for the

automatic transmission model) or the shift

lever to the N (Neutral) position (for the

manual transmission model).

2. Start the engine.

3. Depress the foot brake pedal.

4. Push CLOSE on the soft top operating

switch and hold it until the top is fully closed.

• The soft top indicator light will illuminate

while the top is in motion. (In about 20

seconds, the closing movement will fin-

ish.)

• Windows will automatically be fully

opened.

• The passenger seatback will automatically

move forward, unless the seatback tilt

cancel switch is in the CANCEL position.

It will return to the original position after

the top operation. (See “Automatic pas-

senger seatback tilt function” shown on

the previous page of this section.)

5. Release the switch when the top is fully

closed. (The indicator light, which is illumi-

nated, will begin to flash.)

6. Securely engage the front edge of the top to

the vehicle body with the top latch lever. (The

indicator light turns off.)

IF THE TOP DOES NOT OPEN OR

CLOSE ELECTRICALLY

If you cannot operate the soft top with the

operating switch, first check whether all the

following operating conditions are completed:

쐌 foot brake pedal is depressed

쐌 vehicle is stopped

쐌 ignition switch is ON (Run the engine when

operating the top.)

If the top still does not move under the above

conditions or has any system malfunction, see a

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. When you

must close the top by yourself, in the event of

emergency or when an immediate dealer service

is not available, close the top manually according

to the procedures shown in this section.

When closing the soft top manually:

쐌 Move the vehicle to a safe place, away from

traffic.

쐌 Two people should perform this procedure,

as some of the top parts are extremely heavy.

The top cannot be opened manually.

WARNING

쐌 Do not drive with the top partially

opened.

쐌 If the top cannot be operated prop-

erly, see a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible to have your vehicle

checked.

SPA1693

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

1. Open the trunk lid. In the event of discharged

battery, you need to open the trunk lid as

follows:

a. Open the rear floor box behind the passenger

seat.

b. Remove the cap

쎻

using a suitable tool 쎻

c. Pull the string handle (secondary trunk lid

release)

쎻

until the trunk lid lock is released.

d. Lift up the trunk lid.

2. Open the top storage lid

a. Remove floorboard inside of the trunk.

b. Remove the harness connector

쎻

of the

storage lid motor installed on the back right

side of the trunk by pulling in a downward

direction.

c. Pull down the lock release cable (right and

left)

쎻

d. Listen for a clicking sound of the lock releas-

ing.

e. Pull up the storage lid from the left and right

side of vehicle by hand.

CAUTION

The storage lid is extremely heavy. Pull-

ing it up should be done by two people.

SPA1694 SPA1695

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

3. Close the soft top.

a. Remove the harness connectors of the top

motor,

쎻

(right side of the vehicle) and 쎻

(left side).

CAUTION

Two harness connectors are installed on

the right side and three on the left side

as shown. Only the harness connectors

쎻

and 쎻

should be removed. (Do not

remove the other harness connectors

쎻

, 쎻

and 쎻

b. A person on each side of the vehicle should

slowly pull the top to the closed position.

c. Latch the front edge of the top to the vehicle

body with the top latch lever.

4. Push the storage lid down to the vehicle body

panel and close it. (Listen for locking sounds

from both right and left sides of the lid.)

5. Lower the rear section of the top.

a. Remove the shock absorber

쎻

which sup-

ports the rear section of the top from the

vehicle body. (Both the left and right side

must be removed — the figure above shows

the left side.) To remove the shock absorber,

remove the holder

쎻

on the terminal part

using a flat-bladed screwdriver

쎻

CAUTION

When the shock absorber is removed,

the rear section of the top loses support

SPA1734

Right side

SPA1708

Left side

SPA1697

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

and falls simultaneously. Support the

top by hand so it does not strike the

body.

b. Lower the rear part of the top and push it

onto the top storage lid. The top is locked to

the storage lid, but the bottom of the rear part

is not closed tightly.

CAUTION

쐌 After closing the top manually, have

the system checked and/or repaired

by a NISSAN dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

쐌 Avoid leaving the vehicle outside for

long periods or driving at high

speeds. The rear of the top is not

locked completely, and this may al-

low wind and rain to get into your

vehicle.

CARE OF THE SOFT TOP AND THE

VEHICLE BODY

To use your Roadster safely and comfortably,

you need to observe all the warnings and cau-

tions shown in the previous pages. Also, to

maintain a good appearance of the soft top and

the vehicle body, you need to care for them by

cleaning and/or washing properly.

CAUTION

쐌 Do not use an automatic car wash or

a high-pressure car wash to clean

your vehicle. The top may be dam-

aged and water may leak into the

inside of the vehicle.

쐌 Store the vehicle with the top closed

if it is not to be used for long periods.

Keeping the top stowed for long pe-

riods may cause wrinkles on the sur-

face of the top.

See “Cleaning exterior” in the “7. Appearance

and care” section for detailed instructions.

쐌 A protective clear tape is applied to the top

storage lid painted surface where the soft top

contacts the surface. When the top is fully

closed, the tape may transmit some light,

visible from the inside of the vehicle. This

does not affect the water and air tightness of

the seal.

쐌 The inner surface of the trunk and top storage

lids may show a fibrous, or marbled pattern.

This is the normal appearance of the material

used in these parts.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

OPENER OPERATION

To open the fuel-filler door, push the opener

switch located below the instrument panel. To

lock, close the fuel-filler door securely.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

쎻

To remove the fuel-filler cap, turn it counter-

clockwise.

쎻

Hang the string of the cap on the hook 쎻

shown while refueling.

The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Tighten

the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are

heard.

WARNING

쐌 Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seri-

ously injured if it is misused or mis-

handled. Always stop the engine and

do not smoke or allow open flames

or sparks near the vehicle when refu-

eling.

쐌 Do not attempt to top off the fuel

tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts

off automatically. Continued refuel-

ing may cause fuel overflow, result-

ing in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

SPA1508 SPA2421

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

쐌 Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has

a built-in safety valve needed for

proper operation of the fuel system

and emission control system. An in-

correct cap can result in a serious

malfunction and possible injury. It

could also cause the malfunction in-

dicator light to come on.

쐌 Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

trailer. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death when filling portable

fuel containers:

— Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

— Do not use electronic devices

when filling.

— Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are

filling it.

— Use only approved portable fuel

containers for flammable liquid.

쐌 Never pour fuel into the throttle body

to attempt to start your vehicle.

CAUTION

쐌 If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid

paint damage.

쐌 Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks.

Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the

mal-

function indicator light (MIL) to illu-

minate. If the

light illuminates

because the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle. The

light should turn off after a few

driving trips. If the

light does

not turn off after a few driving trips,

have the vehicle inspected by a

NISSAN dealer.

쐌 For additional information, see the

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

the “2. Instruments and controls”

section.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

TILT OPERATION

Push the lock lever down and adjust the steering

wheel up or down to the desired position.

Push the lock lever up securely to lock the

steering wheel in place.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

1. To block out glare from the front, swing down

the main sun visor

쎻

2. To block glare from the side, remove the main

sun visor from the center mount and swing it

to the side

쎻

3. To use the extension sun visor

쎻

(if so

equipped), pull it out from the main sun visor

as shown.

CAUTION

Do not store the main sun visor before

storing the extension sun visor.

SPA2314

SPA2176

STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

INSIDE MIRROR

Adjust the height and the angle of the inside

mirror to the desired position.

The night position

쎻

will reduce glare from the

headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position

쎻

when driving in daylight

hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-

sary, because it reduces rear view clar-

ity.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE INSIDE

MIRROR (if so equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-

cally changes reflection according to the inten-

sity of the headlight of the following vehicle.

When the inside mirror is in the “I” (AUTO)

position

쎻

, excessive glare from the headlights

of the vehicle behind you will be reduced. The

AUTO indicator light

쎻

(green) will be on.

When the switch of the inside mirror is in the

“쎻” (OFF) position

쎻

, the inside mirror will

operate normally.

For HomeLink

Universal Transceiver, see the

SPA1792 SPA2143 SPA2157

MIRRORS

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

description in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on

the passenger side are closer than they

appear. Be careful when moving to the

right. Using only this mirror could cause

an accident. Use the inside mirror or

glance over your shoulder to properly

judge distances to other objects.

The outside mirror will operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Turn the control knob (located on the driver side

door armrest) to right or left to select the right or

left outside mirror, then adjust using the knob.

SPA1390

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Foldable outside mirrors

Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the

rear of the vehicle.

IC0565

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and

audio systems

Safety note .............................................................................. 4-2

Control panel buttons — with navigation system.......... 4-2

Names of the components ............................................ 4-2

How to use joystick and “ENTER” button................. 4-3

How to use “BACK” button .......................................... 4-3

Setting up the start-up screen ..................................... 4-3

How to use “INFO” button............................................ 4-3

How to use “SETTING” button .................................... 4-5

How to use the “

” button.................................... 4-8

Ventilators ............................................................................... 4-8

Center ventilators ............................................................ 4-8

Side ventilators ................................................................ 4-8

Heater and air conditioner (Automatic) .......................... 4-9

Automatic operation .................................................... 4-10

Manual operation .......................................................... 4-10

Operating tips ............................................................... 4-11

Servicing air conditioner .................................................. 4-12

Audio system ....................................................................... 4-12

Radio ............................................................................... 4-12

FM radio reception ...................................................... 4-13

AM radio reception ...................................................... 4-13

Satellite (SAT) radio reception (if so equipped) ... 4-13

Audio operation precautions ..................................... 4-14

FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player ...... 4-19

FM-AM-SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

changer ........................................................................... 4-23

CD care and cleaning ................................................. 4-29

Steering wheel switch for audio control (if so

equipped)......................................................................... 4-29

Antenna ........................................................................... 4-30

Car phone or CB radio .................................................... 4-31

Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System with

NISSAN voice recognition (if so equipped) ............... 4-31

Using the system........................................................... 4-33

Control buttons .............................................................. 4-35

Getting started ............................................................... 4-35

List of voice commands............................................... 4-37

Speaker adaptation (SA) mode ................................. 4-42

Troubleshooting guide.................................................. 4-45

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

WARNING

쐌 Do not disassemble or modify this

system. If you do, it may result in

accidents, fire, or electric shock.

쐌 Do not use this system if you notice

any abnormality, such as a frozen

screen or lack of sound. Continued

use of the system may result in acci-

dent, fire or electric shock.

쐌 In case you notice any foreign object

in the system hardware, spill liquid

on it, or notice smoke or smell com-

ing from it, stop using the system

immediately and contact a NISSAN

dealer. Ignoring such conditions may

lead to accidents, fire, or electric

shock.

When you use this system, make sure the engine

is running.

If you use the system with the engine not

running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long

time, it will use up all the battery power,

and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“ENTER” button

This is a button on the control panel.

“Display” key

This is a select key on the screen. By selecting

this key you can proceed to the next function.

NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS

1. JOYSTICK and “ENTER” button

2. “INFO” button

3. “SETTING” button

4. “BACK” button

5. “

” brightness control button

For Navigation System control buttons (other

than above), refer to the separate Navigation

System Owner’s Manual.

SAA1289

SAFETY NOTE

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —

WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND

“ENTER” BUTTON

Choose an item on the display using the joystick

and push the ENTER button for operation.

HOW TO USE “BACK” BUTTON

This button has two functions.

To return to the previous screen:

When this button is pushed during setup, setup

will be canceled, and the screen will return to the

previous screen.

To finish the set-up:

When this button is pushed after setup is com-

pleted, the settings will be renewed as directed,

and the screen will return to the map.

INFO:

When the “BACK” button must be pushed, (for

example, after the setup is finished) instructions

are given in the operation procedure of each

section in this manual. If the “BACK” button is

pushed when not finished with the setup, the

setting will be canceled, and the screen will

return to the previous screen.

SETTING UP THE START-UP

SCREEN

When you turn the ignition key to the ACC

position, the SYSTEM START-UP warning is

displayed on the screen. Read the warning and

select the “OK” key then push the “ENTER”

button.

If you do not push the ENTER button, this

system will not proceed to the next step display.

To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO USE “INFO” BUTTON

When the “INFO” button is pushed, the “Main-

tenance” screen will be displayed.

Maintenance information

To set the maintenance interval for the Engine

Oil or Oil Filter, choose an item using the joystick

and push the “ENTER” button.

You can also set to display a message to remind

you that the maintenance needs to be per-

formed.

The following example shows how to set the

engine oil change interval. Use the same steps

SAA1290

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

to set the other maintenance information.

1. Reset the driving distance to the new main-

tenance schedule.

2. Set the interval (mileage) of the maintenance

schedule. To determine the recommended

maintenance interval, refer to your “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide”.

3. To display the MAINTENANCE INFORMA-

TION automatically when the set trip distance

is reached, highlight the “Interval Re-

minder” key with the joystick and push the

“ENTER” button.

4. To return the display to the “Maintenance”

screen, push the “BACK” button.

“Maintenance” display cannot be operated

when the vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle in a

safe place to see the information.

SAA1291

4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Maintenance notice

The “Maintenance Notice” screen (“ENGINE

OIL” or “OIL FILTER”) will be automatically

displayed as shown when both of the following

conditions are met:

쐌 the vehicle is driven the set distance and the

ignition switch is turned OFF.

쐌 the ignition switch is turned ON the next time

the vehicle will be driven.

To return to the previous display after the

“Maintenance Notice” screen is displayed,

push the “BACK” button.

The “Maintenance Notice” screen displays

each time the ignition switch is turned ON until

one of the following conditions are met:

쐌 “Reset Distance” is selected.

쐌 “Interval Reminder” is set OFF.

쐌 the maintenance interval is set again.

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO USE “SETTING” BUTTON

The “Settings” screen will appear when the

“SETTING” button is pushed.

SAA1332 SAA1292

Engine Oil

쎻

/Oil Filter

쎻

SAA1293

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-5

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Display settings

The following menu will appear when pushing

the “SETTING” button, selecting “Display” key

and pushing the “ENTER” button.

Display:

To turn off the screen, select the “Display” key

and push the “ENTER” button to turn off the

“ON” indicator. When any mode button is

pushed with the screen off, the screen turns on

for further operation. The screen will turn off

automatically 5 seconds after the operation is

finished on the map display.

To turn on the screen, select the “Display” key

and turn on the “ON” indicator.

Brightness/Contrast:

To adjust the brightness and contrast of the

screen, select the “Brightness”or“Contrast”

key and push the “ENTER” button. Then you can

adjust the brightness to darker or brighter and

the contrast to lower or higher using the joystick.

Clock settings

The following display will appear when pushing

the “SETTING” button, selecting the “Clock”

key and pushing the “ENTER” button.

On-screen Clock:

When this item is turned to ON, a clock is always

displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.

This clock will indicate the time almost exactly

because it is always adjusted by the GPS

system.

SAA1540 SAA1091

4-6 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Clock Format:

Choose either the 12-hour clock display or the

24-hour clock display.

Offset Adjust:

Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per

minute.

Daylight Saving Time:

Turn this item to ON for daylight saving time

application.

Time Zone:

Choose the time zone from the following

쐌 Pacific

쐌 Mountain

쐌 Central

쐌 Eastern

쐌 Atlantic

쐌 Newfoundland

Language/Units settings

The Language/Units settings screen will appear

when selecting the “Language/Units” key and

pushing the “ENTER” button.

Select the “Select Language”or“Select

Units” key and push the “ENTER” button.

Language: “English” or “Français”

Unit: “US” — Mile, °F, MPG

“Metric” — km, °C, L/100 km

Select the “ON” key of the desired language or

units and push the “ENTER” button.

SAA1295 SAA1296

Display of Select Language

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-7

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

HOW TO USE THE “ ”

BUTTON

Push the “ ” (DAY/NIGHT) button to switch

the display brightness to the daytime or night-

time mode, and adjust the brightness by moving

the joystick right or left.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if

the “BACK” button is pushed, the display will

return to the previous display.

Push the “

” button for more than 2 sec-

onds to turn the display off. Push the button

again for more than 2 seconds to turn the display

on.

CENTER VENTILATORS

Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators.

Moving the lever up or down will open

쎻

the vents.

To change the air flow direction, turn the dial

쎻

SIDE VENTILATORS

Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators by 쎻

opening, 쎻

closing or 쎻

rotating as illustrated.

SAA0600 SAA0601

VENTILATORS

4-8 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

1. Air flow control dial

2. Temperature control dial*

* The display of degrees:

“60-75-90” is used for °F (US).

“18-25-32” is used for °C (Canada).

3. Fan speed control dial

4. Rear window defroster button

(See the “2. Instruments and controls” sec-

tion.)

5. Air intake button

(Air recirculation and Fresh air)

6. A/C (air conditioner) button

WARNING

쐌 The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is

running.

쐌 On hot, sunny days, temperatures in

a closed vehicle could quickly be-

come high enough to cause severe or

possibly fatal injuries to people or

animals. Do not leave children or

adults who would normally require

the assistance of others in your ve-

hicle. Unattended pets should also

not be left alone.

쐌 Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the

interior air to become stale and the

windows to fog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls to

activate the air conditioner.

NOTE:

In your vehicle, the air conditioner system

is designed to automatically activate the

cooling function when operating the air

flow control dial, the fan speed control dial

or the air intake button. (The indicator light

on the A/C button will illuminate.) Push the

A/C button off when the cooling function is

not necessary.

SAA1297

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(Automatic)

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-9

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating

(AUTO)

This mode may be normally used all year round

as the system automatically works to keep a

constant temperature. Air flow distribution and

fan speed are also controlled automatically.

1. Turn the fan speed control dial and air flow

control dial to the AUTO position. The air

conditioner will automatically turn on. (The

A/C button indicator light illuminates.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

쐌 Adjust the temperature to about 75°F (24°C)

for normal operation.

쐌 The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed are also con-

trolled automatically.

A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is

cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunc-

tion.

Heating (AUTO; A/C off)

The air conditioner does not activate. When you

need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Turn the fan speed control dial and air flow

control dial to the AUTO position. (The air

conditioner will turn on.)

2. Push the A/C button to turn off the air

conditioner. (The A/C button indicator light

will turn off.)

3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

쐌 The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed are also con-

trolled automatically.

쐌 Do not set the temperature lower than the

outside air temperature. Otherwise the sys-

tem may not work properly.

쐌 Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the DEF

position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

쐌 To quickly remove ice from the outside of the

windows, turn the fan speed control dial to

the maximum position.

쐌 As soon as possible after the windshield is

clean, turn the air flow control dial to the

AUTO position to return to the auto mode.

쐌 When the air flow control dial is turned to the

or position, the air conditioner

will automatically be turned on at outside

temperatures above 23°F (−5°C) to defog

the windshield, and the air recirculation mode

will automatically be turned off.

Outside air is drawn into the passenger

compartment to improve the defogging per-

formance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Turn the fan speed control dial to manually

control the fan speed.

Turn the dial to the AUTO position to return to

automatic control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation/Fresh air

Each time the air intake button is pushed, the

indicator light on the button will alternate

(Air recirculation) and (Fresh air).

When the

indicator light is on, the interior

4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

air is recirculated. (When the air recirculation

mode is selected with the A/C indicator off while

the fan speed control dial is in the AUTO

position, the air conditioner will turn on.)

When the

indicator light is on, the outside

air is drawn into the passenger compartment.

쐌 When the air intake button is pushed for

longer than 1.5 seconds, both indicator lights

(

and ) will flash twice, and then

the intake air will be controlled automatically.

During this AUTO mode, the indicator light of

the currently selected mode illuminates.

쐌 When the air flow control dial is in the

or position, the air recirculation

mode does not activate.

Air flow control

Turning the air flow control dial selects the air

outlet to:

: Air flows from center and side ventila-

tors.

: Air flows from center and side ventila-

tors and foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

: Air flows from defroster and foot out-

lets.

: Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.

To turn the system off

Turn the fan speed control dial to the OFF

position.

OPERATING TIPS

When the engine coolant temperature and out-

side air temperature are low, the air flow from the

foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of

150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction.

After the coolant temperature warms up, the air

flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.

Sensor

쎻

on the instrument panel helps main-

tain a constant temperature; do not put anything

on or around this sensor.

SAA0603

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-11

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

The air conditioning system in your NISSAN

vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed

with the environment in mind. This refrigerant

will not harm the earth’s ozone layer. How-

ever, special charging equipment and lubricant

are required when servicing your NISSAN air

conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubri-

cants will cause severe damage to your air

conditioning system. See “Capacities and rec-

ommended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical

and consumer information” section for air con-

ditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recom-

mendations.

A NISSAN dealer will be able to service your

environmentally friendly air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-

frigerant under high pressure. To avoid

personal injury, any air conditioner ser-

vice should be done only by an experi-

enced technician with proper equip-

ment.

RADIO

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON and press

the POWER, FM or AM button to turn on the

radio. If you listen to the radio with the engine not

running, the key should be turned to the ACC

position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-

ings, bridges, mountains and other external in-

fluences. Intermittent changes in reception qual-

ity normally are caused by these external

influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-

hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your radio system is equipped with state-of-the-

art electronic circuits to enhance radio recep-

tion. These circuits are designed to extend re-

ception range, and to enhance the quality of that

reception.

However there are some general characteristics

of FM, AM and SAT (satellite — if so equipped)

radio signals that can affect radio reception

quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest

equipment is used. These characteristics are

completely normal in a given reception area, and

do not indicate any malfunction in your radio

system.

Remember that a moving vehicle is not the ideal

place to listen to a radio. Because of the move-

ment, reception conditions will constantly

change. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and

interference from other vehicles can work

against ideal reception. Described below are

some of the factors that can affect your radio

reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to come

from the audio system speakers. Storing the

device in a different location may reduce or

eliminate the noise.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

4-12 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30

miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single

channel) FM having slightly more range than

stereo FM. External influences may sometimes

interfere with FM station reception even if the FM

station is within 25 miles (40 km). The strength

of the FM signal is directly related to the distance

between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals

follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the

same characteristics as light. For example they

will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from

a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade

and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from

buildings, large hills or due to antenna position,

usually in conjunction with increased distance

from the station transmitter, static or flutter can

be heard. This can be reduced by lowering the

treble setting to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective

characteristics of FM signals, direct and re-

flected signals reach the receiver at the same

time. The signals may cancel each other, result-

ing in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can

bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the

ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of

these characteristics. AM signals are also sub-

ject to interference as they travel from transmitter

to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas with

many tall buildings. It can also occur for several

seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in

areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE (SAT) RADIO

RECEPTION (if so equipped)

When the satellite radio is first installed or the

battery has been replaced, the satellite radio

may not work properly. This is not a malfunction.

Wait more than 10 minutes with the satellite

radio ON for the satellite radio to receive all of

the necessary data.

No satellite radio reception is available when the

SAT band option is selected unless optional

satellite receiver and antenna are installed, and

an XM

satellite radio service subscription is

active.

Satellite radio performance may be affected if

cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite

radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite

antenna.

A buildup of ice on the satellite radio antenna

can affect satellite radio performance. Remove

the ice to restore satellite radio reception.

Satellite radio is not available in Alaska and

Hawaii.

SAA0306

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-13

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact Disc (CD) player

CAUTION

쐌 Do not force a compact disc into the

CD insert slot. This could damage the

CD and/or CD changer/player.

쐌 Trying to load a CD with the CD door

closed could damage the CD and/or

CD changer.

쐌 During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the hu-

midity. If this occurs, remove the CD and

dehumidify or ventilate the player com-

pletely.

쐌 The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

쐌 The CD player sometimes cannot func-

tion when the passenger compartment

temperature is extremely high. De-

crease the temperature before use.

쐌 Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or

packaging.

쐌 Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

쐌 CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,

scratched, covered with fingerprints, or

that have pin holes may not work prop-

erly.

쐌 The following CDs may not work prop-

erly:

쐌 Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

쐌 Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

쐌 Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

쐌 Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunction.

쐌 3.1 in (8 cm) discs

쐌 CDs that are not round

쐌 CDs with a paper label

쐌 CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

쐌 This audio system can only play prere-

corded CDs. CDs with MP3 or WMA

format cannot be written in this audio

system.

쐌 If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

SAA0480

4-14 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

CHECK DISC:

쐌 Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-

rectly (the label side is facing up,

etc.).

쐌 Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

PUSH EJECT:

This is a malfunction due to excessive

temperature inside the player. Remove

the CD by pushing the EJECT button.

After a short time, reinsert the CD. The

CD can be played when the temperature

of the player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-

tem (only MP3 or WMA CD in the audio

system with a CD changer).

Compact Disc (CD) with MP3 or

WMA (for the audio system with a

6CD changer)

Explanation of terms:

쐌 MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well-known compressed digital audio

file format. This format allows for near “CD

quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of

normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an

audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the file

size by approximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling:

44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no

perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compression

removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of

a sound signal that the human ear doesn’t

hear.

쐌 WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a

compressed audio format created by Mi-

crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA

codec offers greater file compression than

the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more

digital audio tracks in the same amount of

space when compared to MP3s at the same

level of quality.

쐌 Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of bits

per second used by a digital music file. The

size and quality of a compressed digital audio

file is determined by the bit rate used when

encoding the file.

쐌 Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is

the rate at which the samples of a signal are

converted from analog to digital (A/D conver-

sion) per second.

쐌 Multisession — Multisession is one of the

methods for writing data to media. Writing

data once to the media is called a single

session, and writing more than once is called

a multisession.

쐌 ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that

contains information about the digital music

file such as song title, artist, album title,

encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.

ID3 tag information is displayed on the

Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.

* Windows

and Windows Media are either

registered trademarks and trademarks of Mi-

crosoft Corporation in the United States

and/or other countries.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-15

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Playback order:

Playback order of the CD with compressed files

(MP3/WMA) is as illustrated above.

쐌 The names of folders not containing

MP3/WMA files are not shown in the display.

쐌 If there is a file in the top level of the disc,

“ROOT” is displayed.

쐌 The playback order is the order in which the

files were written by the writing software.

Therefore, the files might not play in the

desired order.

SAA1025

4-16 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems

ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet

* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not sup-

ported.

Supported ver-

sions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA

Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information (Song title and Artist name)

ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3

only)

Folder levels

Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder),

Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*2

01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE

(UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16

Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06:

UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be

played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-17

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the

player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be

played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and num-

ber of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of

MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long time be-

fore the music starts playing.

If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the

music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips

The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not

match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Move immediately to the next song

when playing.

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by

The songs do not play back in the

desired order.

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the

desired order.

4-18 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER

1. MUTE button

2. SEEK/APS REW, APS FF/TRACK

CHANGE button

3. DISP (Display) CHANGE button

4. SCAN tuning button

5. CD play button

6. RADIO (FM/AM) band select button

7. MIX play button

8. RPT (Repeat) play button

9. CD EJECT button

10. TUNE/FF⋅REW button

11. ON⋅OFF/VOL (Volume) control knob

12. Audio/Clock display

13. Station and preset select button

14. AUDIO button

Audio main operation

For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-

tion precautions” earlier in this section.

ON⋅OFF/Volume control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then

push the ON⋅OFF/VOL (Volume) control knob

while the system is off to call up the mode (radio

or CD) which was playing immediately before

the system was turned off. When no CD is

loaded, the radio will come on. While the system

is on, pushing the ON⋅OFF/VOL control knob

turns the system off.

Turn the ON⋅OFF/VOL control knob to adjust

the volume.

AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADER,

BALANCE):

Press the AUDIO button to change the selecting

mode as follows.

SAA1298

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-19

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

BASS → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fader and Balance, push

the AUDIO button until the desired mode

(BASS, TREBLE, FADER or BALANCE) ap-

pears in the display. Push the TUNE

(

, ) or SEEK ( , ) button

to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level.

Use the TUNE or SEEK button also to adjust

Fader or Balance modes. Fader adjusts the

sound level between the front and rear speakers

and Balance adjusts the sound between the

right and left speakers.

After 10 seconds, the radio or CD display

reappears. Once the sound quality is set to the

desired level, push the AUDIO button repeatedly

until the radio or CD display appears.

MUTE button:

Push the MUTE button to mute the audio sound.

Push the MUTE button again to release the

mute.

DISP DISPLAY CHANGE:

Push the DISP button for more than 1.5 seconds

to adjust the digital clock display. See “Clock” in

the “2. Instruments and controls” section for the

clock adjustment operation.

When the DISP button is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds while the compact disc is being

played, the display will show the CD play time.

FM-AM radio operation

RADIO (FM/AM) band select:

Pushing the RADIO band select button will

change the band as follows:

AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM

When RADIO band select button is pushed

while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON, the

radio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on when

the power knob is turned to ON.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO

band select button is pushed, the compact disc

will automatically be turned off and the last radio

station played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM

stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast

signal is weak, the radio will automatically

change from stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE (Tuning) :

Push the TUNE button

or for manual

tuning. To move quickly through the channels,

push and hold either side of the TUNE button

down for more than 0.5 second.

SEEK tuning:

Push the SEEK button

or to tune

from high to low or low to high frequencies and

stops at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning:

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low

to high frequencies and stops at each broad-

casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the but-

ton again during this 5 second period will stop

SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to

that station.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5

seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next sta-

tion.

Station memory operations:

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (six

for FM1, six for FM2) and six stations can be set

for the AM band.

1. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK,

SCAN or TUNE button.

2. Select the desired station and keep pushing

any of the desired station select buttons (1 to

6) until a beep sound is heard. (The radio

mutes when the select button is pushed.)

3. The channel indicator will then come on and

4-20 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

the sound will resume. Memorizing is now

complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if

the fuse blows, the radio memory will be

erased. In that case, reset the desired sta-

tions.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position

and insert the compact disc into the slot with the

label side facing up. The compact disc will be

guided automatically into the slot and start play-

ing.

After loading the disc, the number of tracks on

the disc will appear on the display.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-

cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the

compact disc was playing, pushing the

ON⋅OFF/VOL control knob will start the com-

pact disc.

3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs can also

be used without an adapter.

CD PLAY:

When the CD (CD play) button is pushed with

the system off and the compact disc loaded, the

system will turn on and the compact disc will

start to play.

When the CD button is pushed with the com-

pact disc loaded but the radio playing, the radio

will automatically be turned off and the compact

disc will start to play.

DISP CD PLAY TIME:

Push the DISP button for less than 1.5 seconds

while the compact disc is being played to show

the play time on the display.

FF (Fast Forward), REW

(Rewind):

When the

(fast forward) or (rewind)

button is pushed while the compact disc is

being played, the compact disc will play while

fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is

released, the compact disc will return to normal

play speed.

APS (Automatic Program

Search) FF, APS REW/

TRACK CHANGE:

When the

(APS FF) button is pushed

while the compact disc is being played, the

program next to the present one will start to play

from its beginning. Push several times to skip

through programs. The compact disc will ad-

vance the number of times the button is pushed.

(When the last program on the compact disc is

skipped through, the first program will be

played.) When the

(APS REW) button is

pushed, the program being played returns to its

beginning. Push several times to skip back

through programs. The compact disc will go

back the number of times the button is pushed.

SCAN tuning:

When the SCAN tuning button is pushed while

the CD is being played, the beginning of all the

tracks of CD will be played for 10 seconds in

sequence.

Pushing the button again during this 10 second

period will stop SCAN tuning. If the SCAN

tuning button is not pushed within 10 seconds,

SCAN tuning moves to the next CD program.

MIX MIX play:

When the MIX button is pushed while the com-

pact disc is being played, programs will be

played at random, not following the sequence on

the compact disc. The same program may be

repeated twice. Push the MIX button again to

return to the normal play mode.

REPEAT (RPT) play:

When the RPT button is pushed while the

compact disc is being played, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-21

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

The display shows the following symbol; (no

mark): 1 CD RPT (Repeat)

1: 1 TR (Track) RPT

CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the

compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be

ejected.

When this button is pushed while the compact

disc is being played, the compact disc will come

out and the system will turn off.

If the compact disc comes out and is not

removed, it will be pulled back into the slot

to protect it. (except for 3.1 in [8 cm] diam-

eter compact discs)

If the following message appears on the display,

push the EJECT button:

쐌 CHECK DISC — Eject the disc, and check

whether it is damaged or

inserted upside-down.

쐌 CD ERR F * — Eject the disc, and check

whether it is a proper audio

CD. (* shows a different

number according to the au-

dio condition.)

CD IN indicator:

CD IN indicator appears on the display when the

CD is loaded.

4-22 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER

1. CD LOAD button

2. SEEK/APS REW, APS FF/TRACK

CHANGE button

3. DISP (Display) CHANGE button

4. SCAN tuning button

5. CD PLAY button

6. RADIO (FM/AM/SAT*) band select button

7. PTY (Program type), CAT (Category)* select

button

8. RPT (Repeat) play/CLOCK button

9. CD EJECT button

10. TUNE/FF⋅REW button

11. ON⋅OFF/VOL (Volume) control knob

12. Audio/Clock display

13. Station and preset (FM/AM/SAT*)/CD in-

sert or CD play select button

14. AUDIO button

* No satellite radio reception is available when

the SAT band option is selected unless op-

tional satellite receiver and antenna are in-

stalled, and an XM

satellite radio service

subscription is active.

It may take some time to receive the activation

signal after subscribing to the XM

satellite

radio provider. After receiving the activation

signal, an available channel list will be auto-

matically updated in the radio. Turn the ignition

switch from the LOCK to ACC position to

update the channel list.

Satellite radio is not available in Alaska and

Hawaii.

Audio main operation

For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-

tion precautions” earlier in this section.

Head unit:

The auto loudness circuit enhances the low

SAA1299

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-23

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

frequency range automatically in both radio re-

ception and CD playback.

This audio system has an active noise compen-

sation feature called “Audio Pilot”. The Audio

Pilot uses a microphone to detect external road

noise and automatically adjusts the amplifier to

compensate for any competing high, midrange,

or low frequency noise.

ON⋅OFF/Volume control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then

push the ON⋅OFF/VOL (Volume) control knob

while the system is off to call up the mode (radio

or CD) which was playing immediately before

the system was turned off. When no CD is

loaded, the radio will come on. While the system

is on, pushing the ON⋅OFF/VOL control knob

turns the system off.

Turn the ON⋅OFF/VOL control knob to adjust

the volume.

AUDIO button:

Push the AUDIO button to change the selecting

mode as follows.

BASS → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE →

AUDIOP

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fader and Balance, push

the AUDIO button until the desired mode

(BASS, TREBLE, FADER or BALANCE) ap-

pears in the display. Push the TUNE

(

, ) or SEEK ( , ) button

to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level.

Use the TUNE or SEEK button also to adjust

Fader or Balance modes. Fader adjusts the

sound level between the front and rear speakers

and Balance adjusts the sound between the

right and left speakers.

To change the AUDIOP (Audio Pilot) mode to

OFF or ON, push the TUNE or SEEK button.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the

desired level, push the AUDIO button repeatedly

until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-

wise, the radio or CD display will automatically

reappear after about 10 seconds.

CLOCK adjusting:

Push the RPT button for more than 1.5 seconds

to adjust the digital clock display.

When the clock adjusting display is selected, the

time (hour or minute) will start flashing. See

“Clock” in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section for the detailed clock adjustment opera-

tion.

DISP DISPLAY CHANGE:

This button will work during satellite radio (if so

equipped) and CD operation. Find the detailed

function in the description of each item.

FM-AM-SAT radio operation

RADIO (FM/AM/SAT) band select:

Pushing the RADIO band select button will

change the band as follows:

(Without satellite radio)

AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM

(With satellite radio)

AM → FM1 → FM2 → SAT → AM

No satellite operation is available during scrolling

of modes, unless optional satellite receiver and

antenna are installed, and an XM

satellite radio

service subscription is active.

When RADIO band select button is pushed

while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON, the

radio will come on at the station last played.

The last station/channel played will also come on

when the ON⋅OFF/VOL control knob is pushed

to ON.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO

band select button is turned to ON, the compact

disc will automatically be turned off and the last

radio station/channel played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM

stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast

signal is weak, the radio will automatically

4-24 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

change from stereo to monaural reception.

If the satellite radio signal is lost due to interfer-

ence while driving, in a parking structure or

tunnel for example, “NO SIGNAL” will be dis-

played and no satellite radio station will be

available.

TUNE (Tuning):

Push the TUNE button

or for manual

tuning. To move quickly through the channels,

push and hold either side of the TUNE button

down for more than 0.5 second.

SEEK tuning:

(For FM and AM radio)

Push the SEEK button

or to tune

from high to low or low to high frequencies and

stops at the next broadcasting station.

(For satellite radio)

Push the SEEK button

or to seek

channels of the next or previous category.

SCAN tuning:

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low

to high frequencies and stops at each broad-

casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the but-

ton again during this 5 second period will stop

SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to

that station.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5

seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next sta-

tion.

DISP SAT radio display change (if so

equipped):

쐌 Pushing the DISP button will display addi-

tional information (for example: Title, Artist

name) about the satellite radio broadcast.

쐌 Pushing the DISP button for more than 1.5

seconds will change the display mode as

follows:

Channel number → Channel name → Artist

name → Song title → Channel number

Station memory operations:

Twelve stations/channels can be set for the FM

band (6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and the SAT radio

(6 for SAT1, 6 for SAT2), and 6 stations can be

set for the AM band.

1. Tune to the desired station/channel using the

SEEK, SCAN or TUNE button.

2. Select the desired station/channel and keep

pushing any of the desired station/channel

and preset buttons (1 to 6) until a beep

sound is heard. (The radio mutes when the

station and preset button is pushed.)

3. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Memorizing is now

complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if

the fuse blows, the radio memory will be

erased. In that case, reset the desired sta-

tions.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a

data information service transmitted by some

radio stations on the FM band (not AM band)

and/or SAT encoded within a regular radio

broadcast. Currently, most RDS stations are in

large cities, but many stations are now consid-

ering broadcasting RDS data.

RDS can display:

쐌 Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

쐌 Station name, such as “The Groove”.

쐌 Music or programming type such as “Classi-

cal”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

쐌 Traffic reports about delays or construction.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, the

RDS icon is displayed.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-25

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Program type (PTY)/Category

(CAT) select:

When PTY button is pushed during FM mode,

the PTY (CAT) name of the current tuned station

is displayed. When the PTY (CAT) button is

pushed during satellite radio mode (if so

equipped), the category name of the current

channel is displayed. During this time if the PTY

data code is zero, or the data is unreadable, the

display will show “NONE”.

1. PTY (CAT) selection mode

PTY (CAT) name selection can be done by

the up/down TUNE button

or in

the PTY (CAT) selection mode.

It is possible to shift the PTY (CAT) name by

one step, with one push of the up/down

TUNE button

or .

After selecting a PTY (CAT) name, push the

SEEK button or SCAN button within 10

seconds. Tuning to the PTY (CAT) station will

start. If you do not push the TUNE button

within the 10 second period, the PTY (CAT)

mode will be cancelled.

PTY (CAT) name selection can also be

achieved by pushing the preset buttons.

Initial PTY (CAT) names are stored in the

preset buttons, but these can be changed by

pushing the preset buttons for more than 1.5

seconds when the desired PTY (CAT) name

is in the display.

2. PTY (CAT) SEEK tuning mode

After selecting a PTY (CAT) name, push the

SEEK button

or within 10 sec-

onds. Tuning to the PTY (CAT) station will

start. If you do not push the SEEK button

within the 10 second period, the PTY (CAT)

mode will be cancelled.

3. PTY (CAT) SCAN tuning mode

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune the

PTY (CAT) name station, and stop at each

broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pushing

the button again during this 5 second period

will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will

remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN

tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds,

SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

Compact disc (CD) changer

operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position,

push the LOAD button and insert the compact

disc into the slot with the label side facing up.

The compact disc will be guided automatically

into the slot and start playing.

After loading the disc, the number of tracks on

the disc will appear on the display.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-

cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

CAUTION

Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.

If the system has been turned off while the

compact disc was playing, pushing the

4-26 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

ON⋅OFF/VOL control knob will start the com-

pact disc.

CD LOAD:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the

LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select

the loading slot by pushing the CD insert select

button (1 to 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer in succes-

sion, push the LOAD button for more than 1.5

seconds.

The inserted slot numbers will illuminate on the

display.

CD PLAY:

When the

(CD play) button is pushed with

the system off and the compact disc loaded, the

system will turn on and the compact disc will

start to play.

When the

button is pushed with the com-

pact disc loaded but the tape or the radio

playing, the tape or radio will automatically be

turned off and the compact disc will start to play.

DISP CD PLAY INFORMATION:

When the DISP button is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds while the compact disc is being

played, the play time will be displayed.

When the DISP button is pushed for more than

1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the

disc information display will change.

CD:

CD with MP3 or WMA:

FF (Fast Forward), REW

(Rewind):

CD:

When the

(fast forward) or (rewind)

button is pushed while the compact disc is

being played, the compact disc will play while

fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is

released, the compact disc will return to normal

play speed.

CD with MP3 or WMA:

When the

or button is pushed for

less than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is

being played, the folders in the compact disc will

change.

When the

or button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc

is being played, the compact disc will play while

forwarding or rewinding. When the button is

released, the compact disc will return to the

normal play speed.

APS (Automatic Program

Search) FF, APS REW:

When the

(APS FF) button is pushed

while the compact disc is being played, the

program next to the present one will start to play

from its beginning. Push several times to skip

through programs. The compact disc will ad-

vance the number of times the button is pushed.

(When the last program on the compact disc is

skipped through, the first program will be

played.) When the

(APS REW) button is

pushed, the program being played returns to its

beginning. Push several times to skip back

through programs. The compact disc will go

back the number of times the button is pushed.

CD PLAY select button:

To change CD, push the CD play select button

(1 to 6).

SCAN tuning:

When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for

less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being

played, the beginning of all the tracks of CDs will

be played for 10 seconds in sequence.

When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-27

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

played, the first program in all the CDs will be

played for 10 seconds.

Pushing the button again during this 10 second

period will stop SCAN tuning.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within

10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

disc program.

REPEAT (RPT):

When the RPT play button is pushed while the

compact disc is played, the play pattern can be

changed.

CD:

CD with MP3 or WMA:

The display shows the following symbols.

(no mark): ALL CD RPT (Repeat)

1 DISC: 1 CD RPT

1: 1 TR (Track) RPT or 1 FLDR (Folder) RPT

MIX: ALL CD MIX

1 DISC MIX: 1 CD MIX

1 MIX: 1 FLDR MIX

CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the

compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be

ejected.

To eject the discs selected by the CD select

button, push the EJECT button for less than 1.5

seconds.

To eject all the discs in succession, push the

EJECT button for more than 1.5 seconds.

When this button is pushed while the compact

disc is being played, the compact disc will come

out and the system will turn off.

If the compact disc comes out and is not

removed, it will be pulled back into the slot

to protect it.

If either of the following messages appear on the

display, push the EJECT button:

쐌 PUSH EJECT — Eject the disc, and insert it

again.

쐌 CHECK DISC — Eject the disc, and check

whether it is damaged or

inserted upside-down.

쐌 CD ERR F * — Eject the disc, and check

whether it is a proper audio

CD. (* shows a different

number according to the au-

dio condition.)

CD IN indicator:

CD IN indicator (inserted slot number1-6)

appears on the display when the CD is loaded.

4-28 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

CD CARE AND CLEANING

쐌 Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the

surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.

쐌 Always place the discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.

쐌 To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the

center to the outer edge using a clean, soft

cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular

motion.

Do not use a conventional record cleaner or

alcohol intended for industrial use.

쐌 A new disc may be rough on its inner and

outer edges. Remove the rough edges using

the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

1. VOLUME control switch

2. MODE select switch

3. POWER on/off switch

4. Tuning switch

5. POWER on/MODE select switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR

AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)

The audio system can be operated using the

controls on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switch (for Type A)

With the ignition switch turned to the ACC or

ON position, push the POWER on/off switch to

turn the audio system on or off.

POWER on/MODE select switch

(for Type B)

With the ignition switch turned to the ACC or

ON position, push the POWER on/MODE se-

lect switch to turn the audio system on. Push the

switch to change the mode in the sequence of

AM, FM1, FM2, SAT (if so equipped) and CD.

MODE select switch (for Type A)

Push the MODE select switch to change the

mode.

SAA0451 SAA1300

Type A

SAA1698

Type B

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-29

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Without satellite radio:

AM, FM1, FM2 and CD or CD changer

With satellite radio:

AM, FM1, FM2, SAT and CD changer

VOLUME control switches

Push up or down the VOLUME control switch to

increase or decrease the volume.

Tuning switch

Memory change (radio):

Push up or down the tuning switch for less than

1.5 seconds to change the radio frequency.

SEEK tuning (radio):

Push up or down the tuning switch for more than

1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous radio

station.

APS (Automatic Program Search) FF,

APS REW (CD or CD changer):

Push up or down the tuning switch for less than

1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the

present program or skip to the next program.

Push several times to skip back or skip through

programs.

This system searches for the blank intervals

between selections. If there is a blank interval

within one program or there is no interval be-

tween programs, the system may not stop in the

desired or expected location.

FOLDER change (CD changer/CD with

MP3 or WMA):

Push up or down the tuning switch for more than

1.5 seconds to change the folders (if there are

any folders).

DISC change (CD changer/CD without

MP3 or WMA):

Push up or down the tuning switch for more than

1.5 seconds to change the playing disc up or

down.

ANTENNA

The antenna is located at the rear of the vehicle.

To remove the antenna, turn it counterclockwise.

To reinstall it, screw it securely into the base.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove the antenna before

entering a low-roof garage or an auto-

matic car wash. Otherwise the antenna

may be damaged.

SAA0606

4-30 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in

your NISSAN vehicle, be sure to observe the

following cautions, otherwise the new equip-

ment may adversely affect the Engine Control

system and other electronic parts.

WARNING

쐌 A cellular telephone should not be

used while driving so full attention

may be given to vehicle operation.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the use

of cellular telephones while driving.

쐌 If you must make a call while your

vehicle is in motion, the hands free

cellular phone operational mode (if

so equipped) is highly recommended.

Exercise extreme caution at all times

so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

쐌 If a conversation in a moving vehicle

requires you to take notes, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

쐌 Keep the antenna as far away as

possible from the electronic control

modules.

쐌 Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic con-

trol system harnesses. Do not route

the antenna wire next to any harness.

쐌 Adjust the antenna standing-wave

ratio as recommended by the manu-

facturer.

쐌 Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

쐌 For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

쐌 Use a phone after stopping your ve-

hicle in a safe location. If you have to

use a phone while driving, exercise

extreme caution at all times so full

attention may be given to vehicle

operation.

쐌 If you find yourself unable to devote

full attention to vehicle operation

while talking on the phone, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery,

use a phone after starting the engine.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

BLUETOOTH

HANDS-FREE

PHONE SYSTEM WITH NISSAN

VOICE RECOGNITION (if so

equipped)

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-31

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

1. Volume control switch −/+

2. PHONE SEND

button

3. PHONE END

button

4. Indicator light

5. Microphone

Your vehicle is equipped with the Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner

of a Bluetooth

enabled cellular phone, you can

set up the wireless connection between your

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.

With Bluetooth

wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with

your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-

vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-

ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto-

matically connected with the in-vehicle phone

module when the ignition switch is turned to the

ON position with the paired cellular phone

turned on and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth

cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

쐌 Set up the wireless connection between a

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone mod-

ule before using the Bluetooth

Hands-Free

Phone System.

쐌 Some Bluetooth

enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized by the in-vehicle

phone module. Please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list.

쐌 You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

— Your vehicle is outside of the telephone

service area.

— Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive radio waves; such as in

a tunnel, in an underground parking ga-

rage, near a tall building or in a mountain-

ous area.

— Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it

from being dialed.

When the radio wave condition is not ideal or

ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to

hear the other person’s voice during a call.

Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the in-

vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality

degradation and wireless connection disruption.

While a cellular phone is connected through the

SAA1699

4-32 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Bluetooth

wireless connection, the battery

power of the cellular phone may discharge

quicker than usual.

If the Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System

seems to be malfunctioning, see “Troubleshoot-

ing guide” later in this section. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for troubleshoot-

ing help.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to come

from the audio system speakers. Storing the

device in a different location may reduce or

eliminate the noise.

Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual

regarding the telephone charges, cellular phone

antenna and body, etc.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) this device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation

exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled

environment. This equipment should be installed

and operated with minimum distance 8 in (20

cm) between the radiator and your body. This

Transmitter must not be co-located or operating

in conjunction with any other antenna or trans-

mitter.

USING THE SYSTEM

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows

hands-free operation of the Bluetooth

Hands-

Free Phone System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may

not be available so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initial-

ized, which takes a few seconds. When com-

pleted, the amber light on the overhead console

illuminates and the system is ready to accept

voice commands. If the

button is pushed

before the initialization completes, the system

will announce “Hands-free phone system not

ready” and will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSAN

Voice Recognition system, observe the follow-

ing:

쐌 Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing voice commands correctly.

쐌

Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a

command. Otherwise, the command will not be

received properly.

쐌 Start speaking a command within 5 seconds

after the tone sounds.

쐌 Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, push

and release the

button located on the

steering wheel. The light on the overhead con-

sole flashes to signal you have entered a voice

recognition (VR) session. After the tone sounds,

speak a command.

The command given is picked up by the micro-

phone, and voice feedback is given when the

command is accepted.

쐌 If you need to hear the available commands

for the current menu again, say “Help” and

the system will repeat them.

쐌 If a command is not recognized, the system

announces, “Command not recognized.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-33

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Please try again.” Repeat the command in a

clear voice.

쐌 If you want to go back to the previous

command, you can say “Go back” or “Cor-

rection” anytime the system is waiting for a

response.

쐌 You can cancel a command when the system

is waiting for a response by saying, “Cancel”

or “Quit.” The system announces “Cancel”

and ends the VR session. You can also push

the

button on the steering wheel at any

time. Whenever the VR session is cancelled,

a double beep is played to indicate you have

exited the system.

쐌 If you want to adjust the volume of the voice

feedback, push the volume control switch (+

or −) on the steering wheel while being

provided with feedback. You can also use the

radio volume control knob.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer

to the rules and examples below.

쐌 Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

— “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh

oh”, or

— “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh

oh”

쐌 Words can be used for the first 4 digits

places only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

— “One eight hundred six six two six two oh

oh”,

— NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty

two hundred, and

— NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two

hundred.

쐌 Numbers can be spoken in small groups. The

system will prompt you to continuing entering

digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

— “One eight oh oh”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

— “six six two”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

— “six two oh oh”

쐌 You can say “Star” for * and “Pound” for # at

anytime in any position of the phone number.

(Available only when using the “Call Interna-

tional” command.)

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

— “One five five five one two one two star

one two three”

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers as

single digits.

4-34 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth Hands-

Free Phone System are located on the steering

wheel.

TALK/PHONE SEND

Push the

button to initiate a VR session

or answer an incoming call.

You can also use the

button to skip

through system feedback and to enter com-

mands during a call. See “List of voice com-

mands” and “During a call” later in this sec-

tion for more information.

MODE/PHONE END

Push the

button to cancel a VR session

or end a call.

GETTING STARTED

The following procedures will help you get

started using the Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone

System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For

additional command options, refer to “List of

voice commands” later in this section.

Choosing a language

You can interact with the Bluetooth Hands-

Free Phone System using English, Spanish or

French.

To change the language, perform the following.

1. Press and hold the

button for more

than 5 seconds.

2. The system announces: “Press the PHONE

SEND (

) button for the hands-free

phone system to enter the speaker adapta-

tion mode or press the PHONE END

(

) button to select a different lan-

guage.”

3. Press the

button.

For information on speaker adaptation, see

“Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” later in this

section.

4. The system announces the current language

and gives you the option to change the

language to Spanish (in Spanish) or French

(in French). Use the following chart to select

the language.

NOTE:

You must press the

button or the

button within 5 seconds to change

the language.

Current

language

Press

(TALK/PHONE

SEND)

to select

Press

(MODE/PHONE

END)

to select

English Spanish French

Spanish English French

French English Spanish

5. If you decide not to change the language, do

not press either button. After 5 seconds, the

VR session will end, and the language will not

be changed.

SAA1700

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-35

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Pairing procedure

1. Push the button on the steering wheel.

The system announces the available com-

mands.

2. Say: “Setup”

쎻

. The system acknowledges

the command and announces the next set of

available commands.

3. Say: “Pair phone”

쎻

. The system acknowl-

edges the command and announces the next

set of available commands.

4. Say: “New phone”

쎻

. The system acknowl-

edges the command and asks you to initiate

pairing from the phone handset

쎻

When you are asked to enter a PIN code for

pairing your Bluetooth

cellular phone, oper-

ate it to enter the code “1234”.

The code is always “1234” regardless of the

number of phones paired.

The pairing procedure of the cellular phone

varies according to each cellular phone. See

the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for de-

tails. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/

bluetooth for instructions on pairing NISSAN

recommended cellular phones.

5. The system asks you to say a name for the

phone

쎻

If the name is too long or too short, the

system tells you, then prompts you for a name

again.

Also, if more than one phone is paired and

the name sounds too much like a name

already used, the system tells you, then

prompts you for a name again.

6. The system asks you to assign a priority level

쎻

. The priority level determines which phone

is active when more than one paired

Bluetooth

phone is in the vehicle. Follow the

instructions provided by the system or refer

to “Setup” later in this section for more

information on changing priorities.

7. The system will ask if you would like to select

a custom ring tone

쎻

. Follow the instruc-

tions provided by the system or refer to

“Setup” later in this section for more informa-

tion on selecting ringtones.

Making a call by entering a phone

number

1. Push the button on steering wheel. A

tone will sound.

2. Say: “Call”

쎻

. The system acknowledges

the command and announces the next set of

available commands.

3. Say the number you wish to call

쎻

. For

example, 555-1212 can be said as “five five

five one two one two.” See “How to say

numbers” earlier in this section for more

information.

Say: “Call International” to dial more than 10

digits or any special characters.

4. When you have finished speaking the phone

number, the system repeats it back and

announces the available commands.

5. Say: “Dial”

쎻

. The system acknowledges the

command and makes the call.

4-36 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

For additional command options, see “List of

voice commands” later in this section.

Receiving a call

When you hear the ring tone, press the

button on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the

button

on the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when you

hear the ring tone, press the

button

on the steering wheel to reject the call.

For additional command options, see “List of

voice commands” later in this section.

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

When you push and release the button on

the steering wheel, you can choose from the

commands on the Main Menu. The following

pages describe these commands and the com-

mands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone before

speaking.

You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands

currently available anytime the system is waiting

for a response.

If you want to end an action without completing

it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at anytime the

system is waiting for a response. The system will

end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is

cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate

you have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous command,

you can say “Go back” or “Correction” anytime

the system is waiting for a response.

When you get used to the menus in the system,

you can talk ahead by saying more than one

command at a time. For example, say, “Call five

five five one two one two” or “Memo pad record.”

Also, when you get used to the system re-

sponses, you can skip ahead to the tone by

pressing the

button on the steering wheel.

However, if you press the

button when the

system is waiting for a response from you it will

end the VR session.

“Call”

Name (speak name) 쎻

If you have stored entries in the Phone Book, you

can dial a number associated with a name and

location.

See “Phone book” later in this section to learn

how to store entries.

When prompted by the system, say the name of

the phone book entry you wish to call. The

system acknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associated with the

name, the system asks you to choose the loca-

tion.

Once you have confirmed the name and loca-

tion, the system begins the call.

Number (speak digits)

쎻

When prompted by the system, say the number

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-37

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”

and “Making a call by entering a phone number”

earlier in this section for more details.

“International”

쎻

For dialing more than 10 digits or any special

characters, say “International”. When the system

acknowledges the command, the system will

prompt you to speak the number.

“Redial”

쎻

Use the Redial command to call the last number

that was dialed within the vehicle.

NOTE:

The system will not redial the last number

dialed by the handset keypad.

The system acknowledges the command, re-

peats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the system

announces, “There is no number to redial” and

ends the VR session.

“Call back”

쎻

Use the Call Back command to dial the number

of the last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, re-

peats the number and begins dialing. If a call

back number does not exist, the system an-

nounces, “There is no number to call back” and

ends the VR session.

During a call

During a call there are several command options

available. Press the

button on the steering

wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter

commands.

쐌 “Help” — The system announces the avail-

able commands.

쐌 “Go back/Correction” — The system an-

nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session and

returns to the call.

쐌 “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces

“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns to

the call.

쐌 “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send com-

mand to enter numbers during a call. For

example, if you were directed to dial an

extension by an automated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the command and

sends the tones associated with the num-

bers. The system then ends the VR session

and returns to the call.

쐌 “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-

mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular

phone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call. Call

transferred to privacy mode.” The system

then ends the VR session.

You can also issue the Transfer Call com-

mand again to return to a hands-free call

through the vehicle.

쐌 “Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute

your voice so the other party cannot hear it.

Use the mute command again to unmute your

voice.

NOTE:

If the other party ends the call or the

cellular phone network connection is lost

while the Mute feature is on, the Mute

feature may need to be reset to “off.”

“Phone book”

4-38 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for each

phone paired with the system. Each name can

have up to 4 locations/phone numbers associated

with it.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone

book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone

book if you are currently connected with

Phone B.

“New entry”

쎻

Use the New Entry command to store a new

name in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name

you would like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”

If the name is too long or too short, the system

tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a name

already stored, the system tells you, then

prompts you for a name again.

Once the system accepts the name and you

confirm it is correct, the system asks for a

location (Home, Office, Mobile or Other).

For example, say: “Home.”

The system acknowledges the location. The

system will ask you to say a phone number or to

transfer a phone number stored in the cellular

phone’s memory.

To enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one

two.” See “How to say numbers” earlier in

this section for more information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular

phone’s memory (if so equipped):

Say: “Transfer entry.”

The system acknowledges the command and

asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone

handset. The new contact phone number will be

transferred from the cellular phone via the

Bluetooth

communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to each

cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for details. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions

on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN

recommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts

you for the next command. When you have

finished entering numbers, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location and

number. The system then asks if you would like

to store another location for the same name. If

you do not wish to store another location, the

system ends the VR session.

“Edit”

쎻

Use the Edit command to alter an existing phone

book entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th phone

number to an existing entry.

When prompted by the system, say the name of

the entry you wish to edit.

The system acknowledges the name and asks

you for the location you would like to edit.

Say the name of the location. The system ac-

knowledges the location. The system will ask you

to say a phone number or to transfer a phone

number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.

To enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one

two.” See “How to say numbers” earlier in

this section for more information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular

phone’s memory (if so equipped):

Say: “Transfer entry.”

The system acknowledges the command and

asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone

handset. The new contact phone number will be

transferred from the cellular phone via the

Bluetooth

communication link.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-39

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

The transfer procedure varies according to each

cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for details. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions

on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN

recommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts

you for the next command. When you have

finished entering numbers, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location and

number, then announces that the entry has been

stored. The system then ends the VR session.

“Delete”

쎻

Use the Delete command to erase one entry

from the phone book, all entries from the phone

book, the current redial number or the current

call back number.

To delete entries from the phone book, say a

name or “All entries” when prompted by the

system.

The system acknowledges the command and

asks you to confirm the deletion.

To delete the current redial number or call back

number, say “redial number” or “call back num-

ber” when prompted by the system.

If a redial number or a call back number exists,

the system deletes them without asking for

confirmation.

If there is no number for the entry you are trying

to delete, the system says so and ends the VR

session.

“List names”

쎻

Use the List Names command to hear all the

names and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries but

does not include the actual phone numbers.

When the playback of the list is complete, the

system returns to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any time

by pressing the

button on the steering

wheel. The system ends the VR session.

“Memo pad”

The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voice

memos, each up to 20 seconds long.

“Play”

쎻

The system plays back all the memos in the

order of newest to oldest. The system ends the

VR session.

If there are no memos recorded, the system

announces “No messages to play.” The system

ends the VR session.

“Record”

쎻

The system announces “Recording” and a tone

sounds signaling you to begin.

Speak the information you wish to record clearly.

When you are done, press the

button on the steering wheel.

A tone sounds and the system announces

“Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to end

the VR session.

If the memo pad is full, the system asks if you

wish to record over the oldest memo.

“Delete”

쎻

The Delete command erases all memos. The

system asks you to confirm this action before

deleting all memos.

4-40 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

“Setup”

Use the Setup command to change options

associated with the Bluetooth

Hands-Free

Phone System.

“Pair phone”

쎻

Use the Pair Phone command to pair a phone to

the Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System.

When you are asked to enter a PIN code for

pairing your Bluetooth

cellular phone, operate it

to enter the code “1234”.

The code is always “1234” regardless of the

number of phones paired.

Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair

a sixth phone, the system announces that you

must first delete one phone or replace an exist-

ing phone.

If you try to pair a phone that has already been

paired to your vehicle’s system, the system

announces the name the phone is already using.

The pairing procedure will then be cancelled.

When prompted by the system, choose from the

following commands:

쐌 “New phone” — Refer to “Pairing a phone”

earlier in this section.

쐌 “Replace phone” — The system announces

the names of the phones already paired and

asks which you would like to replace.

Once you say the name of the phone you

wish to replace, the paring procedure will

begin. Refer to “Pairing procedure” earlier in

this section.

쐌 “List phones” — See the description below.

“List phones”

쎻

Use the List Phones command to hear the

names of the phones currently paired. If no

phones are paired, the system announces, “No

paired phones to list.” The system then ends the

VR session.

“Select phone”

쎻

Use the Select Phone command to select a

phone of lesser priority when two or more

phones paired with Bluetooth

Hands-Free

Phone System are in the vehicle at the same

time.

The system asks you to name the phone and

confirm the selection.

Once the selection is confirmed, the selected

phone remains active until the ignition switch is

turned OFF or you select a new phone.

“Change priority”

쎻

Use the Change Priority command to change the

priority level of the active phone.

The priority level determines which phone is

active when more than one paired Bluetooth

phone is in the vehicle.

The system states the priority level of the active

phone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3,

4, 5).

If the new priority level is already being used for

another phone, the two phones will swap priority

levels.

For example, if the current priority levels are:

Priority Level 1 = Phone A

Priority Level 2 = Phone B

Priority Level 3 = Phone C

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-41

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

and you change the priority level of Phone C to

Level 1, then:

Priority Level 1 = Phone C

Priority Level 2 = Phone B

Priority Level 3 = Phone A

“Delete phone”

쎻

Use the Delete Phone command to delete a

specific phone or all phones from the Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System.

The system announces the names of the phones

already paired with the system and their priority

level. The system then gives you the option to

delete a specific phone, all phones or listen to the

list again.

Once you chose to delete a phone or all phones,

the system asks you to confirm this action.

NOTE:

When you delete a phone, the associated

phone book for that phone will also be

deleted.

“Select ringtone”

쎻

Use the Select Ringtone command to select the

tone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call

is received.

The system announces the name of the active

phone and asks you to choose from the follow-

ing commands:

쐌 “Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtone

and asks if you would like to select that tone.

If you say no, the system plays the next

ringtone available and continues to cycle

through the ringtones until you select one or

quit.

쐌 “Silent” — The system asks you to confirm

your wish to disable the ringtone.

“Bluetooth off”

쎻

Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off the

Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System.

When Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System is

off, you will not be able to make or receive calls

using NISSAN Voice Recognition. Also, you will

not have access to the Phone Book.

You can still use the Memo Pad and access

Setup.

To turn on the system again, choose the Blue-

tooth On command from the Setup command.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE

Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of dia-

lect users to train the system to improve recogni-

tion accuracy. By repeating a number of com-

mands, the users can create a voice model of their

own voice that is stored in the system. The system

is capable of storing a different speaker adapta-

tion model for memory A and memory B.

If memory A is available, the system will use

memory A to store the model. If memory A is in

use and memory B is available, the system will

use memory B to store the model. If both of the

memory locations are in use, the system will ask

the user to select which memory location should

be overwritten.

Training procedure

The procedure for training a voice is as follows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet

outdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-

ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-

sion in Park.

3. Press and hold the

button for more

than 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press the PHONE

SEND (

) button for the hands-free

phone system to enter the speaker adapta-

tion mode or press the PHONE END

(

) button to select a different lan-

guage.”

5. Press the

button.

4-42 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

For information on selecting a different lan-

guage, see “Choosing a language” earlier in

this section.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected

automatically. If both memory locations are

already in use, the system will prompt you to

overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-

vided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you are

ready to begin, press the

button.

8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the

instructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will tell

you an adequate number of phrases have

been recorded.

10.The system will ask you to say your name.

Follow the instructions to register your name.

11.The system will announce that speaker adap-

tation has been completed and the system is

ready.

The SA mode will stop if:

쐌 The

button is pressed for more than 5

seconds in SA mode.

쐌 The vehicle is driven during SA mode.

쐌 The ignition switch is turned to the OFF or

LOCK position.

Training phrases

During the SA mode, the system instructs you to

say the following phrases.

(The system will prompt you for each phrase.)

쐌 phone book new entry

쐌 dial three oh four two nine

쐌 delete call back number

쐌 setup pair phone

쐌 memo pad play

쐌 eight pause nine three two pause seven

쐌 delete all entries

쐌 call seven two four zero nine

쐌 phone book delete entry

쐌 memo pad record

쐌 dial star two one seven oh

쐌 Yes

쐌 No

쐌 select ring tone

쐌 dial eight five six nine two

쐌 Bluetooth on

쐌 setup change priority

쐌 call three one nine oh two

쐌 nine seven pause pause three oh eight

쐌 Cancel

쐌 call back number

쐌 call star two zero nine five

쐌 delete phone

쐌 dial eight three zero five one

쐌 Home

쐌 four three pause two nine pause zero

쐌 delete redial number

쐌 phone book list names

쐌 call eight oh five four one

쐌 Correction

쐌 setup change ring tone

쐌 dial seven four oh one eight

쐌 setup main menu

쐌 Delete

쐌 dial nine seven two six six

쐌 memo pad delete

쐌 call seven six three oh one

쐌 go back

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-43

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

쐌 call five six two eight zero

쐌 dial six six four three seven

4-44 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” earlier in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is

too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-

prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” earlier in this section.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry

from the phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by

using the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” earlier in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-45

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

MEMO

4-46 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ............................ 5-2

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ................................. 5-2

Three-way catalyst .......................................................... 5-3

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ................. 5-3

Avoiding collision and rollover ..................................... 5-5

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ............................ 5-6

Ignition switch ....................................................................... 5-6

Automatic transmission ................................................. 5-7

Manual transmission ....................................................... 5-7

Key positions ................................................................... 5-8

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ........................ 5-8

Before starting the engine ................................................. 5-9

Starting the engine ............................................................... 5-9

Driving the vehicle ............................................................. 5-10

Automatic transmission ............................................... 5-10

Manual transmission .................................................... 5-13

Parking brake ...................................................................... 5-15

Cruise control (if so equipped) ...................................... 5-16

Precautions on cruise control ................................... 5-16

Cruise control operations ........................................... 5-17

Break-in schedule .............................................................. 5-18

Increasing fuel economy .................................................. 5-18

Parking/parking on hills .................................................... 5-19

Power steering .................................................................... 5-20

Brake system ....................................................................... 5-21

Braking precautions ..................................................... 5-21

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ............................... 5-21

Traction Control System (TCS) (if so equipped) ...... 5-23

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system

(if so equipped) .................................................................. 5-23

Cold weather driving ......................................................... 5-25

Freeing a frozen door lock ......................................... 5-25

Anti-freeze ...................................................................... 5-25

Battery ............................................................................. 5-25

Draining of coolant water ........................................... 5-25

Tire equipment .............................................................. 5-25

Special winter equipment .......................................... 5-25

Driving on snow or ice ................................................ 5-25

Engine block heater (if so equipped)....................... 5-26

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

WARNING

쐌 Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the support

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should not be left alone either. They

could accidentally injure themselves

or others through inadvertent opera-

tion of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

쐌 Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause per-

sonal injury. (Coupe models)

쐌 Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously

injured. Keep the car locked with the

trunk closed when not in use, and

prevent children’s access to car keys.

(Roadster models)

EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide)

WARNING

Do not breathe exhaust gases; they con-

tain colorless and odorless carbon mon-

oxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous.

It can cause unconsciousness or death.

쐌 If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all

windows fully open, and have the

vehicle inspected immediately.

쐌 Do not run the engine in closed

spaces such as a garage.

쐌 Do not park the vehicle with the en-

gine running for any extended length

of time.

쐌 Keep the rear hatch/trunk lid closed

while driving, otherwise exhaust

gases could be drawn into the pas-

senger compartment. If you must

drive with the rear hatch/trunk lid

open, follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation mode OFF

and the fan control at the maxi-

mum position to circulate the air.

쐌 If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer

through the seal on the rear

hatch/trunk lid or the body, follow

the manufacturer’s recommendation

to prevent carbon monoxide entry

into the vehicle.

쐌 If a special body, camper, or other

equipment is added for recreational

or other usage, follow the manufac-

turer’s recommendation to prevent

carbon monoxide entry into the ve-

hicle. Some recreational vehicle ap-

pliances such as stoves, refrigera-

tors, heaters, etc. may also generate

carbon monoxide.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

쐌 The exhaust system and body should

be inspected by a qualified mechanic

whenever:

• The vehicle is raised for service.

• You suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering into the passenger

compartment.

• You notice a change in the sound

of the exhaust system.

• You have had an accident involv-

ing damage to the exhaust system,

underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission control

device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust

gases in the converter are burned at high tem-

peratures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

쐌 The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, ani-

mals or flammable materials away

from the exhaust system compo-

nents.

쐌 Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They may

ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION

쐌 Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously

reduce the three-way catalyst’s abil-

ity to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

쐌 Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or

electrical systems can cause overrich

fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,

causing it to overheat. Do not keep

driving if the engine misfires, or if

noticeable loss of performance or

other unusual operating conditions

are detected. Have the vehicle in-

spected promptly by a NISSAN

dealer.

쐌 Avoid driving with an extremely low

fuel level. Running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, damag-

ing the three-way catalyst.

쐌 Do not race the engine while warm-

ing it up.

쐌 Do not push or tow your vehicle to

start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recommended

by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-

ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle

has tires of a different size than the size indicated

on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label, you should determine the proper tire infla-

tion pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-

sure telltale when one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when

the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires as soon as

Starting and driving 5-3

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire

causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire

failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-

ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the

vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s

responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the

system is not operating properly. The TPMS

malfunction indicator is combined with the low

tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a

malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-

mately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the

malfunction exists. When the malfunction indica-

tor is illuminated, the system may not be able to

detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of replacement

or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after

replacing one or more tires or wheels on your

vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter-

nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to con-

tinue to function properly.

Additional information

쐌 The TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure

of the spare tire.

쐌 The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle

is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h).

Also, this system may not detect a sudden

drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire

while driving).

쐌 The low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pressure

is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the

recommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to

activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire

pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure

gauge to check the tire pressure.

쐌 Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the

heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and

the outside temperature. Low outside tem-

perature can lower the temperature of the air

inside the tire which can cause a lower tire

inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire

pressure warning light to illuminate. If the

warning light illuminates in low ambient tem-

perature, check the tire pressure for all four

tires.

For additional information, see “Low tire pres-

sure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section and “Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of emergency”

section.

WARNING

쐌 If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location

and stop the vehicle as soon as pos-

sible. Driving with under-inflated

tires may permanently damage the

tires and increase the likelihood of

tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an acci-

dent and could result in serious per-

sonal injury. Check the tire pressure

for all four tires. Adjust the tire pres-

sure to the recommended COLD tire

pressure shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label to turn the

low tire pressure warning light OFF.

If you have a flat tire, replace it with a

5-4 Starting and driving

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

spare tire as soon as possible. (See

“Flat tire” in the “6. In case of emer-

gency” section for changing a flat

tire.)

쐌 When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will remain

on after 1 minute. Contact your

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible

for tire replacement and/or system

resetting.

쐌 Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could af-

fect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

쐌 Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

CAUTION

쐌 The TPMS may not function properly

when the wheels are equipped with

tire chains or the wheels are buried in

snow.

쐌 Do not place metalized film or any

metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the

windows. This may cause poor recep-

tion of the signals from the tire pres-

sure sensors, and the TPMS will not

function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily

interfere with the operation of the TPMS and

cause the low tire pressure warning light to

illuminate. Some examples are:

쐌 Facilities or electric devices using similar

radio frequencies are near the vehicle.

쐌 If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is

being used in or near the vehicle.

쐌 If a computer (or similar equipment) or a

DC/AC converter is being used in or near the

vehicle.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause undes-

ired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss

of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey

all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,

high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-

neuvers, because these driving practices could

cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As

Starting and driving 5-5

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

with any vehicle, a loss of control could

result in a collision with other vehicles or

objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover,

particularly if the loss of control causes the

vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all

times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive

when under the influence of alcohol or drugs

(including prescription or over-the-counter

drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always

wear your seat belt as outlined in the “1. Safety

— Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system” section and also instruct your passen-

gers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an

unbelted or improperly belted person is

significantly more likely to be injured or

killed than a person properly wearing a

seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alco-

hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream

reduces coordination, delays reaction

time and impairs judgement. Driving af-

ter drinking alcohol increases the likeli-

hood of being involved in an accident

injuring yourself and others. Addition-

ally, if you are injured in an accident,

alcohol can increase the severity of the

injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. You must

not drive under the influence of alcohol. Every

year thousands of people are injured or killed in

alcohol related accidents. Although the local

laws vary on what is considered to be legally

intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all

people differently and most people underesti-

mate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And

that is true for drugs, too (over the counter,

prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if

your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by

alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the

LOCK position while driving. The steer-

ing wheel will lock. This may cause the

driver to lose control of the vehicle and

could result in serious vehicle damage

or personal injury.

IGNITION SWITCH

5-6 Starting and driving

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The ignition lock is designed so the key cannot

be turned to the LOCK position and removed

until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

When removing the key from the ignition switch,

make sure the selector lever is in the P (Park)

position.

If the selector lever is not returned to the P (Park)

position, the key cannot be moved to the LOCK

position.

When the key cannot be turned to the LOCK

position, proceed as follows to remove the key:

1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park)

position.

2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ON

direction.

3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.

4. Remove the key.

If the key is removed from the ignition switch, the

selector lever cannot be moved from P (Park)

position. The selector lever can be moved if

the ignition switch is in the ON position

and the foot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position

쎻

in between the

LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position is

indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder. When the

ignition switch is in the OFF position, the steer-

ing wheel is not locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it

must be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclock-

wise from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to

the LOCK position. Remove the key. To

unlock the steering wheel, insert the key

and turn it gently while rotating the steer-

ing wheel slightly right and left.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

The ignition switch includes a device that helps

prevent accidental removal of the key while

driving.

The key can only be removed when the ignition

switch is in the LOCK position.

To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position

from the ACC or ON position, turn the key to the

OFF position, push the key in, then turn the key

to the LOCK position.

There is an OFF position

쎻

in between the

LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position is

indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.

SSD0392 SSD0503

Starting and driving 5-7

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it

must be turned about 1/6 of a turn clockwise

from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to

the LOCK position. Remove the key. To

unlock the steering wheel, insert the key

and turn it gently while rotating the steer-

ing wheel slightly right and left.

KEY POSITIONS

The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock

device.

LOCK (Normal parking position) (0)

The ignition key can only be removed when the

switch is in this position.

OFF (1)

The engine can be turned off without locking the

steering wheel.

The ignition lock is designed so that the key

cannot be turned to LOCK and removed until the

selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

ACC (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessories

such as the radio when the engine is not running.

ON (Normal operating position) (3)

This position turns on the ignition system and the

electrical accessories.

START (4)

This position activates the starter motor, starting

the engine.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the

registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key

(for example, when interference is caused by

another registered key, an automated toll road

device or automated payment device on the key

ring), restart the engine using the following

procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position and wait approximately 10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

If this procedure allows the engine to start,

NISSAN recommends placing the registered key

on a separate key ring to avoid interference from

other devices.

5-8 Starting and driving

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

쐌 Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

쐌 Maintenance items should be checked peri-

odically, for example, each time you check

engine oil.

쐌 Check that all windows and lights are clean.

쐌 Visually inspect tires for their appearance and

condition. Also check tires for proper infla-

tion.

쐌 Lock all doors.

쐌 Position seat and adjust head restraints.

쐌 Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

쐌 Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to

do likewise.

쐌 Check the operation of warning lights when

the ignition key is turned to the ON position.

See “Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders” in the “2. Instruments and con-

trols” section.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic transmission:

Move the selector lever to P (Park) or N

(Neutral). (P preferred.)

The starter is designed not to operate if the

selector lever is in one of the driving posi-

tions.

Manual transmission:

Move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position,

and depress the clutch pedal to the floor

while cranking the engine.

The starter is designed not to operate unless

the clutch pedal is fully depressed.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off the

accelerator pedal by turning the ignition

key to START. Release the key when the

engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to

run, repeat the above procedure.

쐌 If the engine is very hard to start in extremely

cold weather or when restarting, depress the

accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3

to the floor) and hold it then crank the engine.

Release the key and the accelerator pedal

when the engine starts.

쐌 If the engine is very hard to start because it is

flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the

way to the floor and hold it. Crank the engine

for 5 to 6 seconds. After cranking the engine,

release the accelerator pedal. Crank the en-

gine with your foot off the accelerator

pedal by turning the ignition key to START.

Release the key when the engine starts. If the

engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the

above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than

15 seconds at a time. If the engine does

not start, turn the key off and wait 10

seconds before cranking again, other-

wise the starter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30

seconds after starting. Do not race the en-

gine while warming it up. Drive at moderate

speed for a short distance first, especially in

cold weather.

In cold weather, keep the engine running for

a minimum of 2 to 3 minutes before shutting

it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a

short period of time may make the vehicle

more difficult to start.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

Starting and driving 5-9

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

5-speed automatic transmission

The automatic transmission in your vehicle is

electronically controlled by a transmission con-

trol module to produce maximum power and

smooth operation.

Shown on the following pages are the recom-

mended operating procedures for this transmis-

sion. Follow these procedures for maximum ve-

hicle performance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the foot

brake pedal and push the selector lever button

before shifting the selector lever to the R (Re-

verse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) or Manual shift

mode position. Be sure the vehicle is fully

stopped before shifting the selector lever.

This automatic transmission model is de-

signed so that the foot brake pedal must

be depressed before shifting from P (Park)

to any drive position while the ignition

switch is ON.

The selector lever cannot be moved out of

P (Park) position and into any of the other

gear positions if the ignition key is turned

to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the

key is removed from the ignition switch.

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and

push the selector lever button to shift into a

driving gear.

2. Release the parking brake and foot brake,

then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

WARNING

쐌 Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N

(Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or

manual shift mode. Always depress

the brake pedal until shifting is com-

pleted. Failure to do so could cause

you to lose control and have an acci-

dent.

쐌 Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward

or reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

쐌 On slippery roads, do not downshift.

This may cause a loss of control.

쐌 Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)

while the vehicle is moving forward.

Never shift to P (Park) or D (Drive)

while vehicle is moving backward.

These could cause an accident.

CAUTION

When stopping the vehicle on an uphill

grade, do not hold the vehicle by de-

pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot

brake should be used for this purpose.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5-10 Starting and driving

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

To move the selector lever,

: Push the button while depressing the

brake pedal,

: Push the button,

: Just move the selector lever.

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake

pedal and shift the selector lever from P (Park) to

R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive), or Manual

shift mode position.

Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R

(Reverse). All other positions can be selected

without pushing the button.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selector

lever is in any position while the engine

is not running. Failure to do so could

cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly

or roll away and result in serious per-

sonal injury or property damage.

If the key is turned to OFF or ACC for any reason

while the vehicle is in R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or

any D (Drive) position, the key cannot be turned

to LOCK and be removed from the ignition

switch. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position, then the key can be turned to LOCK.

CAUTION

To prevent automatic transmission

damage, use the P (Park) or R (Reverse)

position only when the vehicle is com-

pletely stopped.

P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicle is

parked or when starting the engine. Make sure

the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake

pedal must be depressed and the selector

lever button pushed in to move the selec-

tor lever from N (Neutral) or any drive

position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, first depress the foot

brake pedal, apply the parking brake, then shift

into the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to back up. Always be sure the

vehicle is completely stopped before selecting R

(Reverse). The brake pedal must be de-

pressed and the selector lever button

pushed in to move the selector lever from

P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position

to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.

The engine can be started in this position. You

may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled

engine while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

Manual shift mode

When the selector lever is shifted from D to the

manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or

while driving, the transmission enters the manual

SSD0346

Starting and driving 5-11

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

shift mode. Shift range can be selected manu-

ally.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is

displayed on the position indicator in the meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

→

←

→

←

→

←

→

←

5 (5th):

Use this position for all normal forward driving at

highway speeds.

4 (4th):

Use this position when driving up long slopes, or

for engine braking when driving down long

slopes.

3 (3rd) and

2 (2nd):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on down-

hill grades.

1 (1st):

Use this position when climbing steep hills

slowly or driving slowly through deep snow,

sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on

steep downhill grades.

쐌 Remember not to drive at high speeds for

extended periods of time in lower than

range. This reduces fuel economy.

쐌 When shifting up, move the selector lever to

the + (up) side. (Shifts to higher range.)

쐌 When shifting down, move the selector lever

to the − (down) side. (Shifts to lower range.)

쐌 Moving the selector lever to the same side

twice will shift the ranges in succession.

However, if this motion is rapidly done, the

second shifting may not be completed prop-

erly.

쐌 In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion automatically shifts down to 1st

gear before the vehicle comes to a stop.

When accelerating again, it is necessary

to shift up to the desired range.

쐌 When canceling the manual shift mode, re-

turn the selector lever to the D position. The

transmission returns to the normal driving

mode.

쐌 In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may not shift to the selected gear.

This helps maintain driving performance

and reduces the chance of vehicle dam-

age or loss of control.

Accelerator downshift

— In D position —

For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the

accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the

transmission down into the lower gear, depend-

ing on the vehicle speed.

Fail-safe

When fail-safe operation occurs, the automatic

transmission will be locked in 4th gear.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-

ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning

and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe

system may be activated. This will occur

even if all electrical circuits are functioning

properly. In this case, turn the ignition key

OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the

key back to the ON position. The vehicle

should return to its normal operating con-

dition. If it does not return to its normal

operating condition, have a NISSAN dealer

check the transmission and repair if neces-

sary.

5-12 Starting and driving

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged, the

select lever may not be moved from the P (Park)

position even with the brake pedal depressed.

To move the selector lever, depress the brake

pedal, apply the parking brake, and push the

shift lock release button by using a suitable tool

as shown. Push the selector lever button, then

the selector lever can be moved to N (Neutral).

This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery

is discharged.

If the lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), have

a NISSAN dealer check the automatic transmis-

sion system as soon as possible.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

Shifting

To change gears, or when upshifting or down-

shifting, fully depress the clutch pedal, shift into

the appropriate gear then slowly and smoothly

release the clutch.

This vehicle is equipped with a short throw

shifter manual transmission. To ensure smooth

gear changes, fully depress the clutch pedal

before operating the shift lever. If the clutch

pedal is not fully depressed before the transmis-

sion is shifted, a gear noise may be heard.

Transmission damage could occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd,

4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence accord-

ing to the vehicle speed.

To back up, depress the shift lever and then

move it to the R (Reverse) position after stop-

ping the vehicle completely.

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R

(Reverse) or 1 (Low gear), shift to N (Neutral),

then release the clutch pedal. Fully depress the

clutch pedal again and shift into R or 1.

WARNING

쐌 Do not downshift abruptly on slip-

pery roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

쐌 Do not over-rev the engine when

shifting to a lower gear. This may

cause a loss of control or engine

damage.

CAUTION

쐌 Do not rest your foot on the clutch

pedal while driving. This may damage

the clutch.

SSD0347 SSD0536

Starting and driving 5-13

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

쐌 Fully depress the clutch pedal before

shifting to help prevent transmission

damage.

쐌 Stop your vehicle completely before

shifting into R (Reverse).

쐌 When the vehicle is stopped with the

engine running (for example, at a

stop light), shift to N (Neutral) and

release the clutch pedal with the foot

brake applied.

Up-shift indicator

The manual transmission up-shift indicator is

located in the tachometer and shows the driver

the timing to shift into a higher gear by illuminat-

ing. The use of the up-shift indicator will help you

to upshift at a constant engine speed (rpm) from

any gear.

The up-shift indicator will start flashing when the

engine speed is within about 500 rpm of the set

figure while driving, and then illuminate after the

engine speed reaches the set figure.

The engine speed in revolutions per minute

(rpm) for upshifting can be set on the trip

computer display. See “Trip computer” in the “2.

Instruments and controls” section for the display

setting information.

Use the up-shift indicator when driving as fol-

lows:

쐌 If the maximum engine speed is desired, set

the figure at 7,500 rpm. (The indicator starts

flashing from about 7,000 rpm and comes on

steady at 7,500 rpm.)

쐌 If the maximum engine torque is desired, set

the figure at 4,800 rpm. (The indicator starts

flashing from about 4,300 rpm and comes on

steady at 4,800 rpm.)

쐌 If you want to break in your vehicle, use of the

up-shift indicator with a rather low figure will

help you to avoid the high engine speed.

To make the up-shift indicator not come on, set

the figure at above 8,100 rpm.

There may be a slight difference between

the timing of the up-shift indicator illumi-

nation and the tachometer indication.

SSD0638

5-14 Starting and driving

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Suggested up-shift speeds

Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for

shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions

relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.

Actual up-shift speeds will vary according to

road conditions, the weather and individual driv-

ing habits.

For normal acceleration in low altitude areas

[less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:

Gear change MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 8 (13)

2nd to 3rd 16 (26)

3rd to 4th 25 (40)

4th to 5th 28 (45)

5th to 6th 33 (53)

For quick acceleration in low altitude areas or in

high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:

Gear change MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64)

4th to 5th 45 (72)

5th to 6th 50 (80)

Suggested maximum speed in each

gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not

running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed

(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,

use the highest gear suggested for that speed.

Always observe posted speed limits, and drive

according to the road conditions, which will

ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the en-

gine when shifting to a lower gear as it may

cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control.

Gear MPH (km/h)

1st 40 (65)

2nd 66 (106)

3rd 95 (152)

4th —

5th —

6th —

To apply: pull the parking brake lever up

쎻

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Automatic transmission models:

Move the selector lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion.

Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) posi-

tion.

3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever

slightly, push the button

쎻

and lower the

lever completely

쎻

SPA2110

PARKING BRAKE

Starting and driving 5-15

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning

light goes out.

WARNING

쐌 Be sure the parking brake is fully

released before driving. Failure to do

so can cause brake failure and lead

to an accident.

쐌 Do not release the parking brake

from outside the vehicle.

쐌 Do not use the gear shift in place of

the parking brake. When parking, be

sure the parking brake is fully en-

gaged.

쐌 Do not leave children unattended in a

vehicle. They could release the park-

ing brake and cause an accident.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driv-

ing under the following conditions:

쐌 When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.

쐌 In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies

in speed.

쐌 On winding or hilly roads.

쐌 On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,

etc.).

쐌 In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

CAUTION

On manual transmission models, do not

shift into N (Neutral) without depressing

the clutch pedal when the cruise control

is set. Should this occur, depress the

clutch pedal and turn the main switch

off immediately. Failure to do so may

cause engine damage.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

쐌 If the cruise control system malfunctions, it

cancels automatically. The SET indicator light

on the meter panel then blinks to warn the

driver.

쐌 If the engine coolant temperature becomes

excessively high, the cruise control system

will be canceled automatically.

쐌 If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the

cruise control MAIN (ON⋅OFF) switch off and

have the system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

쐌 The SET indicator light may blink when the

cruise control MAIN switch is turned on while

pushing the RES/ACCEL, COAST/SET, or

CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise

control system, perform the preceding steps

in the order indicated.

CRUISE CONTROL (if so

equipped)

5-16 Starting and driving

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

1. ACCEL or RESUME switch

2. COAST or SET switch

3. CANCEL switch

4. MAIN (ON⋅OFF) switch

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed

between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)

without keeping your foot on the accelerator

pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the MAIN

switch on. The CRUISE indicator light on the

meter panel will come on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle

to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET

switch and release it. (The SET indicator light

will come on.) Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

쐌 To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-

celerator pedal. When you release the pedal,

the vehicle will return to the previously set

speed.

쐌 The vehicle may not maintain the set speed

when going up or down steep hills. If this

happens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following three methods:

a) Push the CANCEL switch; The SET indicator

light will go out.

b) Tap the brake pedal; The SET indicator light

will go out.

c) Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the CRUISE

indicator and SET indicator lights will go out.

쐌 If you depress the brake pedal while pushing

the ACCEL/RES set switch and reset at the

cruising speed, turn the MAIN switch off

once and then turn it on again.

쐌 The cruise control will automatically be can-

celled if the vehicle slows down more than

approximately 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the

set speed.

쐌 If you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-

mission) or move the selector lever to N

(Neutral) position (automatic transmission),

the cruise control will be canceled.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods:

a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and

release the COAST/SET switch.

b) Push and hold the ACCEL/RES set switch.

When the vehicle attains the speed you

desire, release the switch.

c) Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/RES

set switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6

km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods:

a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle

attains the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it.

b) Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-

lease the switch when the vehicle slows

down to the desired speed.

SSD0528

Starting and driving 5-17

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

c) Push, then quickly release the COAST/

SET switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6

km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-

lease the ACCEL/RES set switch. The vehicle

will resume the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to ob-

tain maximum engine performance and

ensure the future reliability and

economy of your new vehicle. Failure to

follow these recommendations may re-

sult in shortened engine life and re-

duced engine performance.

쐌 Avoid driving for long periods at constant

speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the

engine over 4,000 rpm.

쐌 Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

쐌 Avoid quick starts.

쐌 Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

쐌 Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles

(800 km).

쐌 Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain

cruising speeds with a constant accelerator

position.

쐌 Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.

Driving at high speed will lower fuel economy.

쐌 Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.

Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-

hicles.

쐌 Use a proper gear range which suits road

conditions. On level roads, shift into high gear

as soon as possible.

쐌 Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

쐌 Keep your engine tuned up.

쐌 Follow the recommended periodic mainte-

nance schedule.

쐌 Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-

sure. Low tire pressure will increase tire wear

and lower fuel economy.

쐌 Keep the front wheels in correct alignment.

Improper alignment will increase tire wear

and lower fuel economy.

쐌 Air conditioner operation lowers fuel

economy. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

쐌 When cruising at highway speeds, it is more

economical to use the air conditioner and

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

5-18 Starting and driving

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

쐌 Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-

tion” in the “9. Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section.

WARNING

쐌 Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They may

ignite and cause a fire.

쐌 Never leave the engine running while

the vehicle is unattended.

쐌 Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic transmission models:

Move the selector lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion.

Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) posi-

tion. When parking on an uphill grade, place

the shift lever in the 1 (Low gear) position.

MSD0002

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

Starting and driving 5-19

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

WARNING

쐌 Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the

transmission placed into P (Park) for

automatic transmission models or in

an appropriate gear for manual

transmission models. Failure to do

so could cause the vehicle to move

unexpectedly or roll away and result

in an accident.

쐌 Make sure the automatic transmis-

sion selector lever has been pushed

as far forward as it can go and cannot

be moved without depressing the

button at the end of the lever.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into

the street when parked on a sloping drive

way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels

as illustrated.

쐌 HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:

쎻

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the

vehicle forward until the curb side wheel

gently touches the curb.

쐌 HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:

쎻

Turn the wheels away from the curb and

move the vehicle back until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

쐌 HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB:

쎻

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road

so the vehicle will move away from the center

of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position

and remove the key.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the steering will not work. Steering will

be harder to operate.

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic

pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or drive belt breaks, you will

still have control of the vehicle. However, much

greater steering effort is needed, especially in

sharp turns or at low speeds.

POWER STEERING

5-20 Starting and driving

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

The brake system has two separate hydraulic

circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still

have braking at two wheels.

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using engine

vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the

vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,

greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be

required to stop the vehicle and the stopping

distance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while

driving. This overheats the brakes, increases

wear on the brakes and pads, and reduces gas

mileage.

To help save the brakes and to prevent the

brakes from overheating, reduce speed and

downshift to a lower gear before going down a

slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may

reduce braking performance and could result in

loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

쐌 While driving on a slippery surface,

be careful when braking, accelerat-

ing or downshifting. Abrupt braking

or accelerating could cause the

wheels to skid and result in an acci-

dent.

쐌 If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power

assist for the brakes will not work.

Braking will be harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through

water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your

braking distance will be longer and the vehicle

may pull to one side during braking.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed

while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat-up

the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to

normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds

until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the

stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened

or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or

drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the

best braking performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle ser-

vice manual and can be performed by a NISSAN

dealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM

(ABS)

WARNING

쐌 The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

is a sophisticated device, but it can-

not prevent accidents resulting from

careless or dangerous driving tech-

niques. It can help maintain vehicle

control during braking on slippery

surfaces. Remember that stopping

distances on slippery surfaces will be

longer than on normal surfaces even

with ABS. Stopping distances may

also be longer on rough, gravel or

snow covered roads, or if you are

using tire chains. Always maintain a

safe distance from the vehicle in

BRAKE SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-21

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

front of you. Ultimately, the driver is

responsible for safety.

쐌 Tire type and condition may also af-

fect braking effectiveness.

— When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

— When installing a spare tire, make

sure that it is the proper size and type

as specified on the Tire and Loading

Information label. See “Tire and

Loading Information label” in the “9.

Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

— For detailed information, see

“Wheels and tires” in the “8. Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls

the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard

braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.

The system detects the rotation speed at each

wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to

prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By

preventing each wheel from locking, the system

helps the driver maintain steering control and

helps to minimize swerving and spinning on

slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pres-

sure, but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will

operate to prevent the wheels from locking up.

Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping dis-

tances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric

pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The

computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that

tests the system each time you start the engine

and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward

or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may

hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the

brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate

a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-

tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the

ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The

brake system then operates normally, but with-

out anti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the

self-test or while driving, have the vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 MPH

(5 to 10 km/h). The speed varies according to

road conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more wheels

are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly

applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This

action is similar to pumping the brakes very

quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or

feel a vibration from the actuator when it is

operating. This is normal and indicates that the

ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsa-

tion may indicate that road conditions are haz-

ardous and extra care is required while driving.

5-22 Starting and driving

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

On slippery surfaces such as wet asphalt roads,

vehicle wheels may spin when the vehicle is

accelerated. This wheel spin reduces accelera-

tion, or causes the vehicle to swerve, thus

decreasing vehicle stability.

When the vehicle drive wheels begin to spin, the

Traction Control System (TCS) controls the

engine torque using an electronic control sys-

tem, and it also controls automatic control shift-

ing if necessary (for automatic transmission

models). This reduces spinning of the drive

wheels, and result in improved vehicle accelera-

tion performance. It also improves the vehicle

stability by swerving motion.

쐌 When the TCS is operating, the “SLIP” indi-

cator light in the meter panel blinks.

쐌 If the “SLIP” indicator light blinks, the vehicle

is under slippery conditions. Be sure to drive

carefully. See “Slip indicator light” and “Trac-

tion Control System (TCS) off indicator light”

in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

쐌 Indicator light

If a malfunction occurs in the TCS, the “SLIP”

and “TCS OFF” indicator lights come on in

the instrument panel. As long as these indi-

cator lights are illuminated, the traction con-

trol function (except the ABS) is canceled.

The vehicle will behaves like a model without

the TCS.

WARNING

The traction control system is designed

to prevent the wheels from spinning.

However, it does not prevent vehicle

slipping or spinning due to abrupt steer-

ing operation at high speeds or by care-

less or dangerous driving techniques.

Be especially careful when driving on

slippery surfaces and always drive

safely.

When accelerating or driving on slippery sur-

faces, the tires may spin or slide. With the

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors

detect these movements and control the braking

and engine output to help improve vehicle sta-

bility.

쐌 When the VDC system is operating, the

“SLIP” indicator in the instrument panel

blinks.

쐌 If the “SLIP” indicator blinks, the road condi-

tions are slippery. Be sure to adjust your

speed and driving to these conditions. Be

sure to drive carefully. See “Slip indicator

light”, and “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

OFF indicator light” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section.

쐌 Indicator light

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

“SLIP” and “VDC OFF” indicator lights illumi-

nate in the instrument panel. As long as these

indicators are illuminated, the VDC system

function is canceled.

The VDC system uses an Active Brake Limited

Slip (ABLS) system to improve vehicle traction.

The ABLS system works when one of the driving

wheels is spinning on a slippery surface. The

ABLS system brakes the spinning wheel, which

distributes the driving power to the other driving

wheel. If the vehicle is operated with the VDC

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM

(TCS) (if so equipped)

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL

(VDC) SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-23

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

system turned off, all VDC system functions will

be turned off. The ABLS system and ABS will

still operate with the VDC system off. When the

ABLS system is activated, the “SLIP” indicator

light will blink and you may hear a clunk noise

and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is

normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.

While the VDC system is operating, you may feel

a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or

feel a vibration from under the hood. This is

normal and indicates that the VDC system is

working properly.

The VDC system computer has a built-in diag-

nostic feature that tests the system each time

you start the engine and move the vehicle at a

low speed forward or backward. When the

self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise

and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is

normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

쐌 The VDC system is designed to help

improve driving stability but does not

prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or

due to careless or dangerous driving

techniques. Reduce vehicle speed

and be especially careful when driv-

ing and cornering on slippery sur-

faces and always drive carefully.

쐌 Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars and bushings and wheels

are not NISSAN-approved or are ex-

tremely deteriorated the VDC system

may not operate properly. This could

adversely affect vehicle handling per-

formance, and the “VDC OFF” indica-

tor or “SLIP” indicator or both indica-

tor lights may illuminate.

쐌 If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

standard equipment or are extremely

deteriorated, the “VDC OFF” indica-

tor or “SLIP” indicator or both indica-

tor lights may illuminate.

쐌 If engine related parts such as a muf-

fler are not standard equipment or

are extremely deteriorated, the “VDC

OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator or

both indicator lights may illuminate.

쐌 When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly and the “VDC OFF” indi-

cator or “SLIP” indicator or both

indicator lights may illuminate. Do

not drive on these types of roads.

쐌 When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the “VDC OFF” indicator or

“SLIP” indicator or both indicator

lights may illuminate. This is not a

malfunction. Restart the engine after

driving onto a stable surface.

쐌 If wheels or tires other than those

recommended are used, the VDC sys-

tem may not operate properly and the

“VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indi-

cator or both indicator lights may

illuminate.

쐌 The VDC system is not a substitute

for winter tires or tire chains on a

snow-covered road.

5-24 Starting and driving

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply

deicer or glycerin to it through the key hole. If the

lock becomes frozen, heat the key before insert-

ing it into the key hole.

ANTI-FREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the

temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check

anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.

For additional information, see “Engine Cooling

System” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during extremely

cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may

freeze and damage the battery. To maintain

maximum efficiency, the battery should be

checked regularly. For additional information,

see “Battery” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-

freeze, drain the cooling system by opening the

drain plug located under the radiator. Refill

before operating the vehicle. See “Engine cool-

ing system” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section for changing engine coolant.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design to

provide superior performance on dry pave-

ment. However, the performance of these

tires will be substantially reduced in snowy

and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle

on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends

the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON

tires on all four wheels. Consult a NISSAN

dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and

availability information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some provinces

and states prohibit their use. Check local,

state and provincial laws before installing

studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of stud-

ded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces,

may be poorer than that of non-studded

snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For details, see

“Tire chains” in the “8. Maintenance and

do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be

carried in the vehicle during winter:

쐌 a scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove

ice and snow from the windows and wiper

blades.

쐌 a sturdy, flat board to be placed under the

jack to give it firm support.

쐌 a shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-drifts.

쐌 extra window washer fluid to refill the reser-

voir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

쐌 Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” un-

der these conditions. Try to avoid

driving on wet ice until the road is

salted or sanded.

쐌 Whatever the condition, drive with

caution. Accelerate and slow down

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Starting and driving 5-25

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

with care. If accelerating or down-

shifting too fast, the drive wheels will

lose even more traction.

쐌 Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

쐌 Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

쐌 Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch

of ice is seen ahead, brake before

reaching it. Try not to brake while on

the ice, and avoid any sudden steer-

ing maneuvers.

쐌 Do not use cruise control on slippery

roads.

쐌 Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow

clear of the exhaust pipe and from

around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

Engine block heaters are available through

NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature

starting. The engine block heater should be used

when the outside temperature is 20°F (−7°C) or

lower.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block

heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a

grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt

AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged in

for at least2-4hours, depending on outside

temperatures, to properly warm the engine

coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the

engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-

erly store the cord to keep it away from

moving parts.

WARNING

쐌 Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical system

or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be

seriously injured by an electrical

shock if you use an ungrounded con-

nection.

쐌 Disconnect and properly store the

engine block heater cord before

starting the engine. Damage to the

cord could result in an electrical

shock and can cause serious injury.

쐌 Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged

extension cord rated for at least 10 A.

Plug the extension cord into a

Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) pro-

tected, grounded 110-VAC outlet.

Failure to use the proper extension

cord or a grounded outlet can result

in a fire or electrical shock and cause

serious personal injury.

5-26 Starting and driving

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

MEMO

Starting and driving 5-27

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

MEMO

5-28 Starting and driving

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

6 In case of emergency

Flat tire .................................................................................... 6-2

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ................. 6-2

Changing a flat tire ......................................................... 6-2

Jump starting ......................................................................... 6-7

Push starting .......................................................................... 6-9

If your vehicle overheats ..................................................... 6-9

Towing your vehicle ........................................................... 6-10

Towing recommended by NISSAN ......................... 6-11

Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) ............ 6-12

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-

sure of all tires except the spare. When the low

tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of

your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the

vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the

TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low

tire pressure warning light (in the meter panel).

This system will activate only when the vehicle is

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For

more details, refer to “Warning/indicator lights

and audible reminders” in the “2. Instruments

and controls” section and “Tire pressure moni-

toring system (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and

driving” section.

WARNING

쐌 If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location

and stop the vehicle as soon as pos-

sible. Driving with under-inflated

tires may permanently damage the

tires and increase the likelihood of

tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an acci-

dent and could result in serious per-

sonal injury. Check the tire pressure

for all four tires. Adjust the tire pres-

sure to the recommended COLD tire

pressure shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label to turn the

low tire pressure warning light OFF.

If you have a flat tire, replace it with a

spare tire as soon as possible.

쐌 When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will remain

on after 1 minute. Contact your

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible

for tire replacement and/or system

resetting.

쐌 Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could af-

fect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

쐌 Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions

below.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road away

from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking

brake. Shift the manual transmission into R

(Reverse) position (automatic transmission in

P (Park) position).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to

signal professional road assistance person-

nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle

and stand in a safe place, away from traffic

and clear of the vehicle.

FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

WARNING

쐌 Make sure the parking brake is se-

curely applied and the manual trans-

mission is shifted into R (Reverse), or

the automatic transmission into P

(Park).

쐌 Never change tires when the vehicle

is on a slope, ice or slippery areas.

This is hazardous.

쐌 Never change tires if oncoming traffic

is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro-

fessional road assistance.

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks

쎻

at both the front and

back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire

to prevent the vehicle from moving when it

is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the ve-

hicle may move and result in personal

injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools

Remove jacking tools and spare tire from the

storage area located in the luggage/trunk as

illustrated.

Coupe models:

1. Spare tire — Turn the retainer counterclock-

wise to remove.

2. Jack — Turn it counterclockwise to remove.

3. Jacking tools

MCE0001A SCE0409

Coupe models

In case of emergency 6-3

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Roadster models:

1. Spare tire — Turn the retainer counterclock-

wise to remove.

2. Jack — Unfasten the belt and lift the jack up

to remove.

3. Jacking tools — They are in the tool bag.

Jacking up the vehicle and removing

the damaged tire

WARNING

쐌 Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is

necessary to work under the vehicle,

support it with safety stands.

쐌 Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use

the jack provided with your vehicle

on other vehicles. The jack is de-

signed for lifting only your vehicle

during a tire change.

쐌 Use the correct jack up points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for

jack support.

쐌 Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

쐌 Never use blocks on or under the

jack.

쐌 Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack, as it may cause

the vehicle to move. This is especially

true for vehicles with limited slip dif-

ferentials.

쐌 Do not allow passengers to stay in

the vehicle while it is on the jack.

Carefully read the caution label attached to

the jack body and the following instruc-

tions.

SCE0491

Roadster models

6-4 In case of emergency

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point

as illustrated above so that top of the jack

contacts the vehicle at the jack up point.

Align the jack head between the two notches

in the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the

groove of the jack head between the notches

as shown.

The jack should be used on level firm

ground.

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by

turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut

wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts

until the tire is off the ground.

3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears

the ground. To lift the vehicle, securely hold

the jack lever and rod with both hands as

shown above. Remove the wheel nuts, and

then remove the tire.

SCE0410A

Jack-up point

CE1092-A

In case of emergency 6-5

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency

use. See specific instructions under the

heading “Wheels and tires” in the “8. Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the wheel on and tighten the

wheel nuts finger tight. When replacing a

front tire, make sure the hole in the spare tire

wheel is aligned with the pin on the brake

rotor.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel

nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence

illustrated (

쎻

) until they are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches

the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench,

tighten the wheel nuts securely in the se-

quence as illustrated. Lower the vehicle com-

pletely.

WARNING

쐌 Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

쐌 Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the

nuts to become loose.

쐌 Retighten the wheel nuts when the

vehicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts

to the specified torque with a torque

wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 N⋅m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to

specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specification at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure:

After vehicle has been parked for three

hours or more or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label affixed to

the driver’s side center pillar.

Stowing the damaged tire and tools

Securely store the spare tire and jacking equip-

ment in the vehicle.

WARNING

쐌 Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly

secured after use. Such items can

become dangerous projectiles in an

SCE0039

6-6 In case of emergency

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

accident or sudden stop.

쐌 The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. See specific instructions

under the heading “Wheels and tires”

in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, the

instructions and precautions below must be

followed.

WARNING

쐌 If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting

in severe injury or death. It could also

damage your vehicle.

쐌 Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the battery.

Keep all sparks and flames away

from the battery.

쐌 Do not allow battery fluid to come

into contact with eyes, skin, clothing

or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a

corrosive sulfuric acid solution which

can cause severe burns. If the fluid

should come into contact with any-

thing, immediately flush the con-

tacted area with water.

쐌 Keep battery out of the reach of chil-

dren.

쐌 The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated

battery can damage your vehicle.

쐌 Whenever working on or near a bat-

tery, always wear suitable eye protec-

tors (for example, goggles or indus-

trial safety spectacles) and remove

rings, metal bands, or any other jew-

elry. Do not lean over the battery

when jump starting.

쐌 Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause

serious injury.

JUMP STARTING

In case of emergency 6-7

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in damage

to the charging system and cause per-

sonal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,

position the two vehicles to bring their bat-

teries into close proximity to each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply parking brake. Move the selector lever

to the P (Park) position (automatic transmis-

sion models) or move the shift lever to the N

(Neutral) position (manual transmission mod-

els). Switch off all unnecessary electrical

systems (light, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so

equipped). Cover the battery with an old

cloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as

illustrated. (

쎻

)

CAUTION

쐌 Always connect positive (+) to posi-

tive (+) and negative (−) to body

ground (for example, strut mounting

bolt, etc. — not to the battery).

쐌 Make sure that the jumper cables do

not touch moving parts in the engine

compartment and that the cable

clamps do not contact any other

metal.

5. Start the engine of the other vehicle and let it

run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the other vehicle at

about 2,000 rpm, and start your engine in the

normal manner.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged

for more than 10 seconds. If the engine

does not start right away, turn the key

off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying

again.

SCE0664

6-8 In case of emergency

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

7. After starting your engine, carefully discon-

nect the negative cable and then the positive

cable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be

sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the

vent holes as it may be contaminated with

corrosive acid.

Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing.

CAUTION

쐌 Automatic transmission models can-

not be push started. Attempting to do

so may cause transmission damage.

쐌 Three-way catalyst equipped models

should not be started by pushing

since the three-way catalyst may be

damaged.

쐌 Never try to start the vehicle by tow-

ing it; when the engine starts, the

forward surge could cause the ve-

hicle to collide with the tow vehicle.

WARNING

쐌 Do not continue to drive if your ve-

hicle overheats. Doing so could

cause engine damage or a vehicle

fire.

쐌 To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator cap while

the engine is still hot. When the ra-

diator cap is removed, pressurized

hot water will spurt out, possibly

causing serious injury.

쐌 Do not open the hood if steam is

coming out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an

extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if

you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal

noise, etc., take the following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the

parking brake and move the shift lever to the

N (Neutral) position (automatic transmission

to the P (Park) position).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

In case of emergency 6-9

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

windows, and move the temperature control

to maximum hot and the fan control to high

speed.

3. If engine overheating is caused by climbing a

long hill on a hot day, run the engine at a fast

idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) until the tem-

perature gauge indication returns to normal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for

steam or coolant escaping from the radiator

before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant

is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not open

the hood further until no steam or coolant can

be seen.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the

engine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

6. Visually check if the cooling fan is running.

The radiator hoses and radiator should not

leak water.

If coolant is leaking or the cooling fan does

not run, stop the engine.

WARNING

쐌 Be careful not to allow your hands,

hair, jewelry or clothing to come into

contact with, or get caught in, engine

belts or the engine cooling fan.

쐌 The engine cooling fan can start at

any time when the coolant tempera-

ture is high.

7. After the engine cools down, check the cool-

ant level in the reservoir tank with the engine

running. Add coolant to the reservoir tank if

necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at a

NISSAN dealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in

Canada) and local regulations for towing must

be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could

damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are

available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service

operators are generally familiar with the appli-

cable laws and procedures for towing. To assure

proper towing and to prevent accidental damage

to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a

service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable

to have the service operator carefully read the

following precautions.

WARNING

쐌 Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

쐌 Never get under your vehicle after it

has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

쐌 When towing, make sure that the

transmission, axles, steering system

and powertrain are in working condi-

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6-10 In case of emergency

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

tion. If any unit is damaged, dollies

must be used.

쐌 Always attach safety chains before

towing.

For information about towing your vehicle behind

a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”

in the “9. Technical and consumer information”

section of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be

towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the

ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as

illustrated.

CAUTION

쐌 Never tow automatic transmission

models with the rear wheels on the

SCE0342

SCE0489

In case of emergency 6-11

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

ground or four wheels on the ground

(forward or backward) as this may

cause serious and expensive damage

to the transmission.

If it is necessary to tow the vehicle

with the front wheels raised, always

use towing dollies under the rear

wheels.

쐌 When towing rear wheel drive mod-

els with the front wheels on the

ground or on towing dollies:

Turn the ignition key to the OFF po-

sition, and secure the steering wheel

in a straight ahead position with a

rope or similar device. Never secure

the steering wheel by turning the

ignition key to the LOCK position.

This may damage the steering lock

mechanism.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing a

stuck vehicle)

Use the recovery hook by installing it in the front

of the vehicle. (The rear has no towing points.)

1. Remove the front license plate (if so

equipped).

2. Remove the recovery hook cover

쎻

from the

bumper.

3. Securely install the recovery hook

쎻

stored

with jacking tools.

Make sure that the hook is properly secured in

the stored place after use.

WARNING

쐌 Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

쐌 Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode

and result in serious injury. Parts of

your vehicle could also overheat and

be damaged.

CAUTION

쐌 Tow chains or cables must be at-

tached only to the main structural

members of the vehicle or the recov-

ery hook. Otherwise, the vehicle body

will be damaged.

쐌 Do not use the vehicle tie down

hooks to free a vehicle stuck in sand,

snow, mud, etc. Never tow a vehicle

using the vehicle tie down hooks.

쐌 Always pull the cable straight out

from the front of the vehicle. Never

pull on the vehicle at an angle.

SCE0605

6-12 In case of emergency

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

쐌 Pulling devices should be routed so

they do not touch any part of the

suspension, steering, brake or cool-

ing systems.

쐌 Pull devices such as ropes or canvas

straps are not recommended for use

in vehicle towing or recovery.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system or Traction Control System (TCS) (if

so equipped).

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the

vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear

an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-

ward.

쐌 Shift back and forth between R (reverse) and

D (drive) (automatic transmission models) or

1st (low) and R (reverse) (manual transmis-

sion models).

쐌 Apply the accelerator as little as possible to

maintain the rocking motion.

쐌 Release the accelerator pedal before shifting

between R and D (automatic transmission

models) or 1st and R (manual transmission

models).

쐌 Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55

km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries,

contact a professional towing service to re-

move the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-13

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

MEMO

6-14 In case of emergency

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ................................................................... 7-2

Washing ............................................................................ 7-2

Waxing ............................................................................... 7-3

Removing spots .............................................................. 7-3

Underbody ........................................................................ 7-3

Glass .................................................................................. 7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels .................................................. 7-4

Chrome parts ................................................................... 7-4

Tire dressing .................................................................... 7-4

Cleaning interior .................................................................... 7-5

Floor mats ......................................................................... 7-5

Seat belts ......................................................................... 7-6

Corrosion protection ............................................................ 7-6

Most common factors contributing to vehicle

corrosion ........................................................................... 7-6

Environmental factors influence the rate of

corrosion ........................................................................... 7-6

To protect your vehicle from corrosion ..................... 7-6

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

In order to maintain the appearance of your

vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

In the following cases, please wash your vehicle

as soon as possible to protect the paint surface.

쐌 After a rainfall to prevent possible damage

from acid rain

쐌 After driving on coastal roads

쐌 When contaminants such as soot, bird drop-

pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on

the paint surface

쐌 When dust or mud builds up on the surface

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle

inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a

shady area or protect the vehicle with a body

cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface

when putting on or removing the body

cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and

plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly

using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or a

general purpose dish-washing liquid mixed with

clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

쐌 Do not use car washes that use acid

in the detergent. Some car washes,

especially brushless ones, use some

acid for cleaning. The acid may react

with some plastic vehicle compo-

nents, causing them to crack. This

could affect their appearance, and

also could cause them not to function

properly. Always check with your car

wash to confirm that acid is not used.

쐌 Do not use strong household soap,

strong chemical detergents, gasoline

or solvents.

쐌 Do not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight or while the vehicle body is

hot, as the surface may become

water-spotted.

쐌 Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

쐌 For Roadster models, observe the

following:

• Do not use an automatic car wash

or a high pressure car wash. The

soft top may be damaged.

• Avoid applying direct water pres-

sure, such as high pressured water

from household hoses, on the lin-

ing of the soft top and vehicle

body. Avoid applying continuous

water on the parts around the soft

top and the windows. These may

cause water to leak into the inside

of your vehicle.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean

water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,

hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas

must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the

drain holes in the lower edge of the door are

open. Spray water under the body and in the

wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away

road salt.

Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface

by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Soft top care and cleaning (Roadster

models)

Proper care and handling should be observed to

maintain a good appearance of the soft top.

Improper care may cause the top cloth’s surface

to stiffen, stain, or mat. Follow the instructions

shown in this section.

It is not necessary to wash the soft top every

time you wash the vehicle body, but clean the

top regularly before it becomes quite dirty. Leav-

ing the soft top dirty or soiled for a long period

will cause deterioration to the quality of the top

material.

Remove dust or dirt on the soft top with a soft

brush or sponge, then rinse it with plenty of

clean water. When the top is quite dirty, wash

using a mild detergent, such as a general

cleaner especially made for a cloth top or a

general purpose dish-washing liquid, mixed with

clean, lukewarm (never hot) water. Rinse the top

again with plenty of clean water to remove all

traces of soap.

CAUTION

쐌 Do not use strong household soap,

strong chemical detergents, gasoline

or solvents.

쐌 If glass cleaner gets on the soft top,

immediately wash it off with clean

water.

쐌 Do not apply direct water pressure,

such as high pressured water from

household hoses, on the lining of the

soft top and vehicle body, as this may

cause water to leak into the inside of

your vehicle.

After cleaning, always be sure the top and its

storage are completely dry before opening the

top. Opening the top while it is wet or damp may

cause interior water damage, water stains or

mildew on the top.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and

helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing

is recommended to remove built-up wax residue

and to avoid a weathered appearance before

reapplying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the

proper product.

쐌 Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-

ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the

wax.

쐌 Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,

cutting compounds or cleaners that may

damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing

on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull

the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,

and tree sap as quickly as possible from the

surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or

staining. Special cleaning products are available

at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory

store.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, the

underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will

prevent dirt and salt from building up and caus-

ing underbody and suspension corrosion. Be-

fore the winter period and again in the spring, the

underseal must be checked and, if necessary,

re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film

from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to

Appearance and care 7-3

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

become coated with a film after the vehicle is

parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft

cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

쐌 When cleaning the inside of the win-

dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,

abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based

disinfectant cleaners. They could

damage the electrical conductors or

rear window defroster elements.

쐌 If glass cleaner gets on the soft top,

immediately wash it off with clean

water. (Roadster models)

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in a

mild soap solution, especially during winter

months in areas where road salt is used. Salt

could discolor the wheels if not removed.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

쐌 Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the

wheels.

쐌 Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as

ambient temperature.

쐌 Rinse the wheel to completely re-

move the cleaner within 15 minutes

after the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-

abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSING

NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire

dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to

the tires to help reduce discoloration of the

rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it

may react with the coating and form a com-

pound. This compound may come off the tire

while driving and stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

쐌 Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating

on the tire dissolves more easily with an

oil-based tire dressing.

쐌 Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves

(where it would be difficult to remove).

쐌 Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-

pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

쐌 Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by tire dressing manufacturer.

7-4 Appearance and care

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior

trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum

cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and

leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-

ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with

a dry soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to

maintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the

manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric

protectors contain chemicals that may stain or

bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean

the meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION

쐌 Never use benzine, thinner or any

similar material.

쐌 Small dirt particles can be abrasive

and damaging to leather surfaces

and should be removed promptly. Do

not use saddle soap, car waxes, pol-

ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,

detergents or ammonia-based clean-

ers as they may damage the leather

natural finish.

쐌 Never use fabric protectors unless

recommended by the manufacturer.

쐌 Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may

damage the lens cover.

FLOOR MATS

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it

easier to clean the interior. No matter what

mats are used, be sure they are fitted for

your vehicle and are properly positioned in

the footwell to prevent interference with

pedal operation. Mats should be maintained

with regular cleaning and replaced if they be-

come excessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aid

(driver’s side only)

This model includes a front floor mat bracket to

act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor

mats have been specially designed for your

vehicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has a

grommet hole incorporated in it. Simply position

the mat by placing the floor mat bracket through

the floor mat grommet hole while centering the

mat in the floorpan contour.

Periodically check to make certain that the mats

are properly positioned.

SAI0012

CLEANING INTERIOR

Appearance and care 7-5

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them

with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.

Allow the belts to dry completely before using

them. See “Seat belt maintenance” in the “1.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in

the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or

chemical solvents to clean the seat

belts, since these may severely weaken

the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

쐌 The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt

and debris in body panel sections, cavities,

and other areas.

쐌 Damage to paint and other protective coat-

ings caused by gravel and stone chips or

minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the

vehicle body underside can accelerate corro-

sion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely

inside the vehicle, and should be removed for

drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high

relative humidity, especially those areas where

the temperatures stay above freezing and where

atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is

used.

Temperature

A temperature increase will accelerate the rate

of corrosion to those parts which are not well

ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air

in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will

accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will

also accelerate the disintegration of paint sur-

faces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE

FROM CORROSION

쐌 Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the

vehicle clean.

쐌 Always check for minor damage to the paint

and repair it as soon as possible.

쐌 Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors

open to avoid water accumulation.

쐌 Check the underbody for accumulation of

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water

as soon as possible.

CORROSION PROTECTION

7-6 Appearance and care

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

CAUTION

쐌 Never remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compart-

ment by washing it out with a hose.

Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or

broom.

쐌 Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic com-

ponents inside the vehicle as this

may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are

extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion

and deterioration of underbody components

such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,

brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned

periodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-

sion, which may be required in some areas,

consult a NISSAN dealer.

Appearance and care 7-7

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

MEMO

7-8 Appearance and care

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements ................................................. 8-2

General maintenance ........................................................... 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items ............... 8-2

Maintenance precautions ................................................... 8-5

Engine compartment check locations ............................. 8-7

Engine cooling system ........................................................ 8-8

Checking engine coolant level .................................... 8-8

Changing engine coolant ............................................. 8-9

Engine oil ................................................................................ 8-9

Checking engine oil level .............................................. 8-9

Changing engine oil and filter ................................... 8-10

Automatic transmission fluid ........................................... 8-12

Power steering fluid .......................................................... 8-12

Brake and clutch fluid ....................................................... 8-13

Brake fluid ....................................................................... 8-13

Clutch fluid ..................................................................... 8-14

Window washer fluid ........................................................ 8-14

Battery ................................................................................... 8-15

Jump starting ................................................................. 8-16

Drive belts ............................................................................ 8-17

Spark plugs ......................................................................... 8-17

Replacing spark plugs ................................................ 8-17

Air cleaners .......................................................................... 8-18

Windshield wiper blades ................................................. 8-19

Cleaning ......................................................................... 8-19

Replacing ....................................................................... 8-20

Brakes ................................................................................... 8-21

Self-adjusting brakes .................................................. 8-21

Brake pad wear indicators ......................................... 8-21

Fuses ..................................................................................... 8-21

Engine compartment ................................................... 8-22

Passenger compartment ............................................ 8-23

Keyfob battery replacement.............................................. 8-24

Lights ..................................................................................... 8-26

Headlights ...................................................................... 8-27

Exterior and interior lights .......................................... 8-28

Wheels and tires ................................................................ 8-30

Tire pressure ................................................................. 8-30

Tire labeling..................................................................... 8-34

Types of tires ................................................................. 8-36

Tire chains ...................................................................... 8-37

Changing wheels and tires ........................................ 8-37

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Your new NISSAN has been designed to have

minimum maintenance requirements with long

service intervals to save you both time and

money. However, some day-to-day and regular

maintenance is essential to maintain your

NISSAN’s good mechanical condition, as well

as its emission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that

scheduled maintenance, as well as general

maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who

can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper

maintenance care. You are a vital link in the

maintenance chain.

Scheduled maintenance:

For your convenience, both required and op-

tional scheduled maintenance items are de-

scribed and listed in your “NISSAN Service and

Maintenance Guide”. You must refer to that

guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is

performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance:

General maintenance includes those items

which should be checked during normal day-to-

day operation. They are essential for proper

vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to

perform these procedures regularly as pre-

scribed.

Performing general maintenance checks re-

quires minimal mechanical skill and only a few

general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by

yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a

NISSAN dealer.

Where to go for service:

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle

appears to malfunction, have the systems

checked and tuned by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists

and are kept up to date with the latest service

information through technical bulletins, service

tips, and in-dealership training programs. They

are completely qualified to work on NISSAN

vehicles before they work on your vehicle,

rather than after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s

service department performs the best job to

meet the maintenance requirements of your ve-

hicle — in a reliable and economic way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the

vehicle, general maintenance should be per-

formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If

you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or

smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a

NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you

should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that

repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenance

work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-

tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with “*” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

performed from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors

and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as

the trunk lid or back hatch. Also make sure that

all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary.

Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the

hood from opening when the primary latch is

released.

When driving in areas using road salt or other

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis.

Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail

lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all

operating properly and installed securely. Also

check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking

the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and

check for any loose nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires cannot be rotated in this

vehicle.

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often

and always prior to long distance trips. Adjust

the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to

the pressure specified. Check carefully for dam-

age, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components: Replace the TPMS

transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap

when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle

pulls to either side while driving on a straight and

level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal

tire wear, there may be a need for wheel align-

ment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal

highway speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to

“Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire

Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular

basis. Check the windshield at least every six

months for cracks or other damage. Have a

damaged windshield repaired by a qualified re-

pair facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks

or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked on a regular basis, such as when

performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the

vehicle, etc.

Automatic transmission P (Park) position

mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that the

vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in

the P (Park) position without applying any

brakes.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for

smooth operation and make sure the pedal does

not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor

mat away from the pedal.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth

operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes

down further than normal, the pedal feels spongy

or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see

a NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor

mat away from the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the

vehicle to one side when applied. Check the

brake booster function. Be sure to keep floor mat

away from the pedal.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake op-

eration regularly. The vehicle should be securely

held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking

brake applied. If the parking brake needs to be

adjusted, see a NISSAN dealer.

Seats: Check seat position controls such as

seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure

they operate smoothly and that all latches lock

securely in every position. Check that the head

restraints move up and down smoothly and that

the locks (if equipped) hold securely in all

latched positions.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt

system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters

and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,

and are installed securely. Check the belt web-

bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

steering conditions, such as excessive free play,

hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that all

warning lights and chimes are operating prop-

erly.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that

the wipers and washer operate properly and that

the wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly and

in good quantity when operating the heater or air

conditioner.

Under the hood and the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked periodically (for example, each time you

check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. It

should be between the MAX and MIN lines.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

Brake and clutch fluid levels*: Make sure that

the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the

MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level

when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt is

frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level on the

dipstick after parking the vehicle on a level spot,

turning off the engine and waiting 10 minutes.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose

supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the

exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of

exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble

and correct it. (See “Precautions when starting

and driving” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).)

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel,

oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has

been parked for a while. Water dripping from the

air conditioner after use is normal. If you should

notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,

check for the cause and have it corrected imme-

diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check

the level in the reservoir tank with the engine off.

Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,

cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,

etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the

hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration

or loose connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex-

posed to corrosive substances such as those

used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very

important to remove these substances, other-

wise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel

lines and around the exhaust system. At the end

of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly

flushed with plain water, being careful to clean

those areas where mud and dirt may accumu-

late. For additional information, see “Cleaning

exterior” in the “7. Appearance and care” sec-

tion.

Window washer fluid*: Check that there is

adequate fluid in the tank.

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

When performing any inspection or maintenance

work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent

serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to

the vehicle. The following are general precau-

tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

쐌 Park the vehicle on a level surface,

apply the parking brake securely and

block the wheels to prevent the ve-

hicle from moving. For manual trans-

mission models, move the shift lever

to N (Neutral) position. For automatic

transmission models, move the se-

lector lever to P (Park).

쐌 Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF

or LOCK position when performing

any parts replacement or repairs.

쐌 If you must work with the engine

running, keep your hands, clothing,

hair and tools away from moving

fans, belts and any other moving

parts.

쐌 It is advisable to secure or remove

any loose clothing and remove any

jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc.

before working on your vehicle.

쐌 Always wear eye protection when-

ever you work on your vehicle.

쐌 If you must run the engine in an

enclosed space such as a garage, be

sure there is proper ventilation for

exhaust gases to escape.

쐌 Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is nec-

essary to work under the vehicle,

support it with safety stands.

쐌 Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from the fuel tank and

battery.

쐌 On gasoline engine models with the

multiport fuel injection (MFI) system,

the fuel filter or fuel lines should be

serviced by a NISSAN dealer because

the fuel lines are under high pressure

even when the engine is off.

CAUTION

쐌 Do not work under the hood while

the engine is hot. Turn the engine off

and wait until it cools down.

쐌 Avoid contact with used engine oil

and coolant. Improperly disposed en-

gine oil, engine coolant and/or other

vehicle fluids can damage the envi-

ronment. Always conform to local

regulations for disposal of vehicle

fluid.

쐌 Never connect or disconnect the bat-

tery or any transistorized component

while the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

쐌 Never leave the engine or automatic

transmission related component har-

nesses disconnected while the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position.

This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

gives instructions regarding only those items

which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also avail-

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-

der information” in the “9. Technical and con-

sumer information” section.

You should be aware that incomplete or im-

proper servicing may result in operating difficul-

ties or excessive emissions, and could affect

your warranty coverage. If in doubt about any

servicing, have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

1. Fuse/fusible link holder

2. Battery

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T models)

6. Window washer fluid reservoir

7. Power steering fluid reservoir

8. Air cleaner

9. Radiator filler cap

10. Engine drive belts

11. Engine coolant reservoir

12. Engine oil dipstick

Do not tamper with the strut tower bar

adjustment

쎻

. The strut tower bar has

been adjusted to the most suitable posi-

tion at the factory.

CAUTION

Tampering with the strut tower bar ad-

justment may cause a noise while driv-

ing or damage to the hood or engine.

SDI2050

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory

with a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze cool-

ant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains

rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional

cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING

쐌 Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.

Wait until the engine and radiator

cool down. Serious burns could be

caused by high pressure fluid escap-

ing from the radiator. See precau-

tions in “If your vehicle overheats”

found in the “6. In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual.

쐌 The radiator is equipped with a pres-

sure type radiator cap. To prevent

engine damage, use only a genuine

NISSAN radiator cap.

Outside temperature

down to

Anti-

freeze

Deminer-

alized

water/

distilled

water

°C °F

−35 −30 50% 50%

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green) or

equivalent with the proper mixture ratio

of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineral-

ized water/distilled water. The use of

other types of coolant solutions may

damage your engine cooling system.

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank

when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is

below MIN

쎻

, add coolant up to the MAX

쎻

level. If the reservoir tank is empty, check the

coolant level in the radiator when the engine is

cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radia-

tor, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler

opening and also add it to the reservoir tank up

to the MAX

쎻

level.

Tighten the cap securely after adding engine

coolant.

SDI2051

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

If the engine cooling system frequently

requires coolant, have it checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

Contact a NISSAN dealer if replacement is

required.

쐌 Major cooling system repairs should be per-

formed by a NISSAN dealer. The service

procedures can be found in the appropriate

NISSAN Service Manual.

쐌 Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine overheating.

WARNING

쐌 To avoid being scalded, never change

the coolant when the engine is hot.

쐌 Never remove the radiator cap when

the engine is hot. Serious burns

could be caused by high pressure

fluid escaping from the radiator.

쐌 Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

쐌 Keep coolant out of reach of children

and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.

Check your local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

the operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10

minutes for the oil to drain back into the

oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Rein-

sert it all the way.

SDI2045

ENGINE OIL

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil

level. It should be between the H and L marks

쎻

. If the oil level is below the L mark

쎻

remove the oil filler cap and pour recom-

mended oil through the opening. Do not

overfill

쎻

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the

break-in period, depending on the severity

of operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly.

Operating the engine with an insuffi-

cient amount of oil can damage the

engine, and such damage is not covered

by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND

FILTER

Change the engine oil and filter according to the

maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN Service

and Maintenance Guide”.

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

the operating temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10

minutes.

4. Raise and support the vehicle using a suit-

able floor jack and safety jack stands.

쐌 Place the safety jack stands under the vehicle

jack-up points.

쐌 A suitable adapter should be attached to the

jack stand saddle.

5. Remove the plastic engine undercover.

a. Remove the small plastic clip at the center

point of the undercover.

b. Then remove the other bolts that hold the

undercover in place.

CAUTION

Make sure the correct lifting and sup-

port points are used to avoid vehicle

damage.

Engine oil and filter

1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug

쎻

2. Remove the oil filler cap.

3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and

completely drain the oil.

WARNING

쐌 Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin

cancer.

SDI2052

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

쐌 Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made,

wash thoroughly with soap or hand

cleaner as soon as possible.

쐌 Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the

engine oil is hot.

쐌 Waste oil must be disposed of properly.

쐌 Check your local regulations.

Perform steps 4 to 7 when the engine oil filter

change is needed.

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench

쎻

. Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface

with a clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket mate-

rial remaining on the mounting surface

of the engine. Failure to do so could

lead to engine damage.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean

engine oil.

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight

resistance is felt, then tighten additionally

more than 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:

11 to 15 ft-lb

(14.7 to 20.5 N⋅m)

8. Clean and re-install the drain plug and a new

washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a

wrench.

Drain plug tightening torque:

22 to 29 ft-lb

(29 to 39 N⋅m)

Do not use excessive force.

9. Refill engine with recommended oil and in-

stall the cap securely.

CAUTION

The dipstick must be inserted in place to

prevent oil spillage from the dipstick

hole while filling the engine with oil.

See “Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants” in the “9. Technical and consumer

information” section for drain and refill capac-

ity. The drain and refill capacity depends on

the oil temperature and drain time. Use these

specifications for reference only. Always use

the dipstick to determine the proper amount

of oil in the engine.

10. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the drain plug and the oil filter.

Correct as required.

11. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10

minutes. Check the oil level with the dip-

stick. Add engine oil if necessary.

After the operation

1. Install the engine undercover into position as

outlined in the following steps.

a. Pull the center of the small plastic clip out.

b. Hold the engine undercover into position.

c. Insert the clip through the undercover into the

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

hole in the frame, then push the center of the

clip in to lock the clip in place.

d. Install the other bolts that hold the under-

cover in place. Be careful not to strip the

bolts or over-tighten them.

2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.

3. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.

When checking or replacement is required, we

recommend a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

CAUTION

쐌 Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic J

ATF. Do not mix with other fluids.

쐌 Using automatic transmission fluid

other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J

ATF will cause deterioration in drive-

ability and automatic transmission

durability, and may damage the auto-

matic transmission, which is not cov-

ered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-

ited warranty.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir tank.

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT

range at fluid temperatures of 122 - 176°F (50 -

80°C) or using the COLD range at fluid tem-

peratures of 32 - 86°F (0 - 30°C).

If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine

NISSAN PSF fluid. Remove the cap and fill

through the opening.

SDI1443

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

FLUID

POWER STEERING FLUID

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

CAUTION

쐌 Do not overfill.

쐌 Recommended fluid is Genuine

NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

For more information regarding suitable equiva-

lents, see “Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical and con-

sumer information” section.

For additional brake and clutch fluid information,

refer to “Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants” in the “9. Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

WARNING

쐌 Use only new fluid from a sealed

container. Old, inferior or contami-

nated fluid may damage the brake

system. The use of improper fluids

can damage the brake system and

affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.

쐌 Clean the filler cap before removing.

쐌 Brake fluid is poisonous and should

be stored carefully in marked con-

tainers out of the reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted

surfaces. This will damage the paint. If

fluid is spilled, immediately wash the

surface with water.

BRAKE FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is

below the MIN line

쎻

or the brake warning light

comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy

Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to

the MAX line

쎻

. If fluid must be added fre-

quently, the system should be thoroughly

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

SDI1923

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

CLUTCH FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid

level is below the MIN line

쎻

, add Genuine

NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or

equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line

쎻

If fluid is added frequently, the system should be

thoroughly checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Add fluid when the low washer fluid warning light

comes on.

Add a washer solvent to the washer fluid for

better cleaning. In the winter season, add a

windshield washer anti-freeze. Follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-

shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-

freeze or equivalent.

WARNING

Anti-freeze is poisonous and should be

stored carefully in marked containers

out of the reach of children.

CAUTION

쐌 Do not substitute engine anti-freeze

coolant for window washer solution.

This may result in damage to the

paint.

쐌 Do not fill the window washer reser-

voir tank with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl

alcohol based washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the win-

dow washer reservoir tank.

쐌 Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s rec-

ommended levels before pouring the

fluid into the window washer reser-

voir tank. Do not use the window

SDI1906 SDI2053

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

washer reservoir tank to mix the

washer fluid concentrate and water.

쐌 Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean

the battery with a solution of baking soda and

water.

쐌 Make certain the terminal connections are

clean and securely tightened.

쐌 If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or

longer, disconnect the (−) negative battery

terminal to prevent discharging it.

CAUTION

When the battery cable is removed from

the battery terminal, do not close either

of the front doors. The automatic win-

dow adjusting function will not work,

and the side roof panel/top side rail

may be damaged by doing so.

To disconnect the negative (−) battery ter-

minal, perform the procedure in the follow-

ing order. Otherwise, the window and the

side roof panel/top side rail may contact

and be damaged.

1. Close the windows.

2. Open the hood.

3. Close and lock all the doors using the

key or keyfob.

4. Disconnect the negative (−) battery ter-

minal.

5. Securely close the hood.

To connect the negative (−) battery termi-

nal, perform the procedure in the following

order. Otherwise, the window and the side

roof panel/top side rail may contact and be

damaged.

1. Unlock (using the key) and open the

driver side door. Do not close the door.

2. Open the hood.

3. Connect the negative (−) battery termi-

nal. Then close the hood.

4. Fully open the driver side door window.

5. Close the driver side door and the win-

dow.

WARNING

쐌 Do not expose the battery to flames

or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas,

generated by battery fluid, is explo-

sive. Do not allow battery fluid to

BATTERY

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or

painted surfaces. After touching a

battery or battery cap, do not touch

or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash

your hands. If the acid contacts your

eyes, skin or clothing, immediately

flush with water for at least 15 min-

utes and seek medical attention.

쐌 Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid

in the battery is low. Low battery fluid

can cause a higher load on the bat-

tery which can generate heat, reduce

battery life, and in some cases lead

to an explosion.

쐌 When working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protection

and remove all jewelry.

쐌 Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash hands after han-

dling.

쐌 Keep the battery out of the reach of

children.

Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be

between the UPPER LEVEL

쎻

and LOWER

LEVEL

쎻

lines.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled

water to bring the level to the indicator in each

filler opening. Do not overfill.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

1. Remove the cell plugs

쎻

2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL

line

쎻

3. Tighten cell plugs.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”

in the “6. In case of emergency” section. If the

engine does not start by jump starting, the

battery may have to be replaced. Contact a

NISSAN dealer.

DI0137MA SDI1480

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

1. Power steering fluid pump

2. Alternator

3. Crankshaft pulley

4. Air conditioner compressor

5. Drive belt auto-tensioner

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or

LOCK position before servicing drive

belts. The engine could rotate

unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual

wear, cuts, fraying, oil adhesion or looseness.

If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have

it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly for condi-

tion.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer

for servicing.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch

are off and that the parking brake is

engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to

remove the spark plugs. An incorrect

socket can damage the spark plugs.

SDI2061

DRIVE BELTS SPARK PLUGS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace the iridium-tipped

spark plugs as frequently as the conventional

type spark plugs since they will last much longer.

Follow the maintenance log shown in the

“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”, but

do not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by

cleaning or regapping.

Always replace spark plugs with recom-

mended or equivalent ones.

To remove the filter from the air cleaner, pull off

the retainers

쎻

and pull the unit upward

쎻

The filter element should not be cleaned and

reused. Replace it according to the maintenance

log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-

nance Guide”. When replacing the filter, wipe

the inside of the air cleaner housing and the

cover with a damp cloth.

WARNING

쐌 Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you or

others to be burned. The air cleaner

not only cleans the air, it stops the

flame if the engine backfires. If it is

not there, and the engine backfires,

you could be burned. Do not drive

with the air cleaner removed, and be

careful when working on the engine

with the air cleaner removed.

쐌 Never pour fuel into the throttle body

or attempt to start the engine with

the air cleaner removed. Doing so

could result in serious injury.

SDI2020

SDI2054

AIR CLEANERS

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

CAUTION

쐌 After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position.

Otherwise it may be damaged when

the engine hood is opened.

쐌 Make sure the wiper blades contact

the glass; otherwise the arms may be

damaged from wind pressure.

쐌 Worn windshield wiper blades can

damage the windshield and impair

driver vision.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the

windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters

when running, wax or other material may be on

the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a

washer solution or a mild detergent. Your wind-

shield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing

with clear water.

Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked

in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then

rinse the blade with clear water. If your wind-

shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades

and using the wiper, replace the blades.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Pull the wiper arm.

2. Push the release tab

쎻

, then move the wiper

blade down the wiper arm to remove

쎻

3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm

until a click sounds.

If necessary, clean the windshield washer

nozzle

쎻

with a needle or small pin 쎻

*1: Only for passenger’s side wiper arm

*2: Adjustable washer nozzles

SDI1649

SDI1730A

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the

brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the

brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system

check if the brake pedal height does not

return to normal.

BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have au-

dible wear indicators. When a brake pad re-

quires replacement, it will make a high pitched

scraping or screeching sound when the vehicle

is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is

depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as

possible if the wear indicator sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-

sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may

be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to

moderate stops is normal and does not affect

the function or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For additional information, see the

appropriate maintenance log shown in the

NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.

Some vehicles are equipped with engine com-

partment and passenger compartment fuse

boxes that use only type

쎻

fuses. Other ve-

hicles are equipped with type

쎻

fuses in the

engine compartment fuse box and type

쎻

fuses

in the passenger compartment fuse box.

Type

쎻

fuses are provided as spare fuses. They

are stored in the passenger compartment fuse

box.

Type

쎻

fuses can be installed in the engine

compartment and passenger compartment fuse

boxes.

SDI1751

BRAKES FUSES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

If a type 쎻

fuse is used to replace a type 쎻

fuse, the type 쎻

fuse will not be level with the

fuse pocket as shown in the illustration. This will

not affect the performance of the fuse. Make

sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Type

쎻

fuses cannot be installed in the under-

hood fuse boxes. Only use type

쎻

fuses in the

underhood fuse boxes.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and headlight

switch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood and remove the cover

on the battery and the fuse/fusible link holder.

3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder cover by

pushing the tabs

쎻

and lifting the cover

쎻

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The

fuse puller is located in the passenger com-

partment fuse box.

5. If the fuse is open

쎻

, replace it with a new

fuse

쎻

. Spare fuses are stored in the pas-

senger compartment fuse box.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by a NISSAN

dealer.

SDI1752 SDI1479B SDI1753

8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not operate and

fuses are in good condition, check the fusible

links. If any of these fusible links are melted,

replace only with genuine NISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are OFF.

2. Open the fuse box lid

쎻

3. Pinch the fuse perpendicularly with the fuse

puller

쎻

and pull it out.

SDI1962

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

4. If the fuse is open 쎻

, replace it with a new

fuse

쎻

. Spare fuses

쎻

are stored in the

fuse box.

5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by a NISSAN

dealer.

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swal-

low the battery and removed parts.

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Open the lid using a suitable tool.

2. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery:

CR2025 or equivalent

SDI1754

SDI1608

KEYFOB BATTERY

REPLACEMENT

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Make sure that the ⊕ side faces the

bottom case.

쐌 Do not touch the internal circuit and electric

terminals as doing so could cause a malfunc-

tion.

3. Close the lid securely.

4. Push the keyfob button two or three times to

check its operation.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance

for replacement.

If the battery is removed for any reason

other than replacement, perform step 4

above.

쐌 Be careful not to touch the circuit board

and the battery terminal.

쐌 An improperly disposed battery can

harm the environment. Always confirm

local regulations for battery disposal.

쐌 The keyfob is water-resistant; however,

if it gets wet, immediately wipe it com-

pletely dry.

쐌 When changing batteries, do not let

dust or oil get on the keyfob.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause undes-

ired operation of the device.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

쎻

Front view

1. Headlight (low-beam, high-beam)

2. Spot light

3. Front park light

4. Front turn signal light

5. Front side marker light

쎻

Rear view (Coupe),

쎻

Rear view (Roadster)

6. Luggage compartment light (Coupe) or Trunk

light (Roadster)

7. High-mounted stop light

8. Rear combination light

(Side marker, Stop/Tail)

9. License plate lights

10. Rear combination light

(Back-up, Turn signal)

SDI2058

LIGHTS

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

HEADLIGHTS

Replacing

If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer.

Xenon headlight bulb:

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they

produce a high voltage. To prevent an

electric shock, never attempt to modify

or disassemble. Always have your xe-

non headlights replaced at a NISSAN

dealer. For additional information, see

“Headlight and turn signal switch” in

the “2. Instruments and controls” sec-

tion.

CAUTION

Use the same number and wattage as

originally installed:

Bulb no. (Wattage)

D2S (35W) - Xenon low/high-beam

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the

exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A

temperature difference between the inside and

the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not

a malfunction. If large drops of water collect

inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Front turn signal light* 28/8 3457NA

Front park light* 5 T10

Front side marker light* (LED) —

Rear combination light (Upper)

Stop/Tail* (LED) —

Side marker* (LED) —

Rear combination light (Lower)

Back-up* 21 T20

Turn signal* 21 T20

License plate light (x 2) 5 T10

High-mounted stop light* (LED) —

Spot light 8 —

Luggage compartment light (Coupe) 5 —

Trunk light (Roadster)* 3.4 —

Vanity mirror light 1.8 —

Cup holder light* 1.1 —

Rear floor box light* 1.4 —

*: See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

NOTE: Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest information about parts.

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When

replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or

cover.

MDI0006

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Interior light (Roadster)

Be careful not to snap the nails

쎻

on the plastic

cover when removing it.

SDI1450A

SDI1572

SDI1779

SDI1451

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-

sure of all tires except the spare. When the low

tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of

your tires is significantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Also,

this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire

pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pressure

warning light” in the “2. Instruments and con-

trols” section, “Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section,

and “Flat tire” in the “6. In case of emergency”

section.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including the

spare) often and always prior to long

distance trips. The recommended tire

pressure specifications are shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label under

the “COLD TIRE PRESSURE” heading.

The Tire and Loading Information label is

affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire

pressures should be checked regularly

because:

쐌 Most tires naturally lose air over time.

쐌 Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other objects

or if the vehicle strikes a curb while

parking.

The tire pressures should be checked

when the tires are cold. The tires are

considered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours, or

driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at mod-

erate speeds.

SDI1401A

WHEELS AND TIRES

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-

der inflation, may adversely affect

tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

쐌 Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an acci-

dent.

쐌 The Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing (GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label. The vehicle weight

capacity is indicated on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

Do not load your vehicle be-

yond this capacity. Overloading

your vehicle may result in re-

duced tire life, unsafe operating

conditions due to premature

tire failure, or unfavorable han-

dling characteristics and could

also lead to a serious accident.

Loading beyond the specified

capacity may also result in fail-

ure of other vehicle compo-

nents.

쐌 Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your

vehicle, use a tire pressure

gauge to ensure that the tire

pressures are at the specified

level.

쐌 Do not drive your vehicle over

85 MPH (137 km/h) unless it is

equipped with high speed rated

tires. Driving faster than 85

MPH (137 km/h) may result in

tire failure, loss of control and

possible injury.

쐌 For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Tire and Loading Information label

쎻

Seating capacity: The maximum

number of occupants that can be

seated in the vehicle.

쎻

Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-

mation in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section.

쎻

Original size: The size of the tires

originally installed on the vehicle at

the factory.

쎻

Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to

this pressure when the tires are cold.

Tires are considered COLD after the

vehicle has been parked for 3 or

more hours, or driven less than 1

mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

The recommended cold tire inflation

is set by the manufacturer to provide

the best balance of tire wear, vehicle

handling, driveability, tire noise, etc.,

up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

쎻

Tire size — refer to “Tire labeling”

later in this section.

쎻

Spare tire size or compact spare tire

size (if so equipped).

SDI1948

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Checking the tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the

tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely

onto the valve stem. Do not press too

hard or force the valve stem sideways,

or air will escape. If the hissing sound

of air escaping from the tire is heard

while checking the pressure, reposi-

tion the gauge to eliminate this leak-

age.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge

stem and compare it to the specifica-

tion shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too

much air is added, press the core of

the valve stem briefly with the tip of the

gauge stem to release pressure. Re-

check the pressure and add or release

air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,

including the spare.

Coupe

model

Size

Cold Tire

Inflation

Pressure

Front

Original

Tire

225/45R18

245/40R18

240 kPa

(35 psi)

Rear

Original

Tire

245/45R18

265/35R19

240 kPa

(35 psi)

Spare

Tire

T145/80D17

420 kPa

(60 psi)

Roadster

model

Size

Cold Tire

Inflation

Pressure

Front

Original

Tire

225/45R18

240 kPa

(35 psi)

Rear

Original

Tire

245/45R18

240 kPa

(35 psi)

Spare

Tire

T145/80D17

420 kPa

(60 psi)

SDI1949

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers

to place standardized information on the

sidewall of all tires. This information iden-

tifies and describes the fundamental

characteristics of the tire and also pro-

vides the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The TIN

can be used to identify the tire in case of

a recall.

쎻

Tire size (example: P215/65R15

95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles. (Not all

tires have this information.)

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-

ber gives the width in millimeters of the

tire from sidewall edge to sidewall

edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,

known as the aspect ratio, gives the

tire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This number is

the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This

number is the tire’s load index. It is a

measurement of how much weight

each tire can support. You may not

find this information on all tires be-

cause it is not required by law.

7. Tire Speed Rating. You should not

drive the vehicle faster than the tire

speed rating.

SDI1575

Example

SDI1951

Example

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

쎻

TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX

XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-

ment of Transportation”. The

symbol can be placed above,

below or to the left or right of the

Tire Identification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identi-

fication mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Op-

tional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture

6. Four numbers represent the week and

year the tire was built. For example, the

numbers 3103 means the 31st week

of 2003. If these numbers are missing,

then look on the other sidewall of the

tire.

쎻

Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of

rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire

manufacturers also must indicate the

materials in the tire, which include

steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

쎻

Maximum permissible inflation pres-

sure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire. Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure.

쎻

Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum

load in kilograms and pounds that

can be carried by the tire. When

replacing the tires on the vehicle,

always use a tire that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tire.

쎻

Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an

inner tube (“tube type”) or not

(“tubeless”).

쎻

The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire

has radial structure.

쎻

Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is

shown.

Other tire-related terminology:

In addition to the many terms that are

defined throughout this section, Intended

Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that

contains a whitewall, bears white letter-

ing or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same molding on the

SDI1607

Example

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the

outward facing sidewall of an asymmetri-

cal tire that has a particular side that must

always face outward when mounted on a

vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

쐌 When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same

type (i.e., Summer, All Season or

Snow) and construction. A NISSAN

dealer may be able to help you with

information about tire type, size,

speed rating and availability.

쐌 Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory

equipped tires, and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum

speed rating of the tire.

쐌 Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could af-

fect the proper operation of the tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS).

쐌 For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-

formation” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies all season tires on some

models to provide good performance for use all

year round, including snowy and icy road condi-

tions. All season tires are identified by ALL

SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow

tires have better snow traction than all season

tires and may be more appropriate in some

areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models

to provide superior performance on dry roads.

Summer tire performance in snow and ice will be

substantially reduced. Summer tires do not have

the tire traction rating M&S on the tire sidewall.

If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy

conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of

snow or all season tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select

tires equivalent in size and load rating to the

original equipment tires. If you do not, it can

adversely affect the safety and handling of your

vehicle.

Generally, snow tires will have lower speed

ratings than factory equipped tires and may not

match the potential maximum vehicle speed.

Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the

tire.

If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy

conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of

snow or all season tires on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires

may be used. However, some provinces and

states prohibit their use. Check local, state and

provincial laws before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow

tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than

that of non-studded snow tires.

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Tire chains/cables should not be in-

stalled on 265/35R19 size tires. Installa-

tion of the tire chains/cables on

265/35R19 size tires will cause damage

to the vehicle. If you plan to use tire

chains/cables, you should install

245/45R18 size tires on your vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according

to location. Check the local laws before installing

tire chains. When installing tire chains, make

sure they are of proper size for the tires on your

vehicle and are installed according to the chain

manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE

class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on

vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.

Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are

designed to meet the SAE standard minimum

clearances between the tire and the closest

vehicle suspension or body component required

to accommodate the use of a winter traction

device (tire chains or cables). The minimum

clearances are determined using the factory

equipped tire size. Other types may damage

your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recom-

mended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure

a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must

be secured or removed to prevent the possibility

of whipping action damage to the fenders or

undercarriage. If possible, avoid fully loading

your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition,

drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your ve-

hicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling

and performance may be adversely affected.

쐌 Never install the tire chains on a T-type

spare tire.

쐌 Do not use the tire chains on dry roads.

쐌 Tire chains must be installed only on the

rear wheels and not on the front wheels.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

Tires cannot be rotated in this vehicle, as

front tires are different size from rear tires

and the direction of wheel rotation is fixed

in each tire.

A pin is on the front brake rotor to prevent

the rear wheels from being installed in

place of the front wheels. The spare tire

can be installed in place of the front and

rear wheels. When installing the spare

tire in the front wheel, the hole in the

spare tire wheel must be aligned with the

pin on the brake rotor.

WARNING

쐌 Retighten the wheel nuts when the

vehicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

쐌 For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-

formation” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

1. Wear indicator

2. Wear indicator location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

쐌 Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking,

bulging or objects caught in the

tread. If excessive wear, cracks,

bulging or deep cuts are found,

the tire(s) should be replaced.

쐌 The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When the

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

쐌 Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare,

over 6 years old checked by a

qualified technician because

some tire damage may not be

obvious. Replace the tires as

necessary to prevent tire failure

and possible personal injury.

쐌 Improper service of the spare

tire may result in serious per-

sonal injury. If it is necessary to

repair the spare tire, contact a

NISSAN dealer.

쐌 For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

SDI1663

8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, speed

rating and load carrying capacity as originally

equipped. See “Specifications” in the “9. Tech-

nical and consumer information” section for rec-

ommended types and sizes of tires and wheels.

WARNING

쐌 The use of tires other than those

recommended or the mixed use of

tires of different brands, construction

(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread

patterns can adversely affect the ride,

braking, handling, ground clearance,

body-to-tire clearance, tire chain

clearance, speedometer calibration,

headlight aim and bumper height.

Some of these effects may lead to

accidents and could result in serious

personal injury.

쐌 If the wheels are changed for any

reason, always replace with wheels

which have the same off-set dimen-

sion. Wheels of a different off-set

could cause premature tire wear,

possibly degraded vehicle handling

characteristics and/or interference

with the brake discs/drums. Such in-

terference can lead to decreased

braking efficiency and/or early brake

pad/shoe wear.

쐌 When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will remain

on after 1 minute. Contact your

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible

for tire replacement and/or system

resetting.

쐌 Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could af-

fect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

쐌 Do not install a damaged or de-

formed wheel or tire even if it has

been repaired. Such wheels or tires

could have structural damage and

could fail without warning.

쐌 The use of retread tire is not recom-

mended.

쐌 For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-

formation” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling

and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can

get out of balance. Therefore, they should be

balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be performed

with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing

the front wheels on the vehicle could lead to

transmission damage.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to

“Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire

Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information booklet.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Care of wheels

쐌 Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

to maintain their appearance.

쐌 Clean the inner side of the wheels when the

wheel is changed or the underside of the

vehicle is washed.

쐌 Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing

the wheels.

쐌 Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of

pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

쐌 NISSAN recommends that the road wheels

be waxed to protect against road salt in areas

where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (T-type spare tire)

Observe the following precautions if the T-type

spare tire must be used, otherwise your vehicle

could be damaged or involved in an accident.

CAUTION

쐌 The T-type spare tire should be used

for emergency use only. It should be

replaced by the standard tire at the

first opportunity.

쐌 Drive carefully while the T-type spare

tire is installed.

Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking

while driving.

쐌 Periodically check the T-type spare

tire inflation pressure, and always

keep it at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

쐌 Do not drive your vehicle at speeds

faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

쐌 Do not use tire chains on a T-type

spare tire. Tire chains will not fit

properly on the T-type spare tire and

may cause damage to the vehicle.

쐌 Tire tread of the T-type spare tire will

wear at a faster rate than the stan-

dard tire. Replace the T-type spare

tire as soon as the tread wear indica-

tors appear.

쐌 Because the T-type spare tire is

smaller than the original tire, ground

clearance is reduced. To avoid dam-

age to the vehicle, do not drive over

obstacles. Also, do not drive the ve-

hicle through an automatic car wash

since it may get caught.

쐌 Do not use the T-type spare tire on

other vehicles.

쐌 Do not use more than one T-type

spare tire at the same time.

쐌 Do not tow a trailer while the T-type

spare tire is installed.

8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants .............. 9-2

Fuel recommendation .................................................... 9-3

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation .................. 9-5

Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant

recommendations ........................................................... 9-6

Specifications ........................................................................ 9-7

Engine ................................................................................. 9-7

Wheels and tires.............................................................. 9-8

Dimensions and weights ............................................... 9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle in another

country ..................................................................................... 9-9

Vehicle identification ............................................................ 9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate ................. 9-9

Vehicle identification number (chassis number) ..... 9-9

Engine serial number ................................................... 9-10

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ................ 9-10

Emission control information label ........................... 9-10

Tire and loading information label ............................ 9-11

Air conditioner specification label ............................ 9-11

Installing front license plate ............................................. 9-12

Vehicle loading information ............................................. 9-13

Terms ............................................................................... 9-13

Vehicle load capacity.................................................... 9-14

Loading tips .................................................................... 9-16

Measurement of weights ............................................. 9-16

Towing a trailer ................................................................... 9-17

Maximum load limits .................................................... 9-17

Towing safety ................................................................ 9-18

Flat towing............................................................................. 9-21

Automatic transmission ................................................ 9-22

Manual transmission ..................................................... 9-22

Uniform tire quality grading ............................................. 9-22

Emission control system warranty ................................. 9-23

Reporting safety defects (US only) ............................... 9-23

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test

(US only) .............................................................................. 9-24

Event data recorders (EDR) ............................................ 9-25

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information ... 9-26

In the event of a collision ........................................... 9-26

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure

instructed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate)

Recommended

specifications

measure

Imp

measure

Liter

Fuel 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 76 Unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96)*1

Engine oil (Drain and refill)*2

With oil filter change 5-1/8 qt 4-3/8 qt 4.9

쐌 Engine oil with API Certification Mark*3

쐌 Viscosity SAE 5W-30

Without oil filter change 4-7/8 qt 4 qt 4.6

Cooling system

With reservoir 9-1/2 qt 7-7/8 qt 9.0

50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent

50% Demineralized or distilled water

Reservoir 7/8 qt 3/4 qt 0.8

Automatic transmission fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF*4

Manual transmission gear oil — — —

Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity

SAE 75W-85 or 75W-90

Differential gear oil — — —

Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5, Viscosity SAE

80W-90*5

Power steering fluid (PSF)

Refill to the proper fluid level according to the instructions in

the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*6

Brake and clutch fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*7 or equivalent DOT 3

Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*8

Air conditioning system lubricants — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalent

Windshield washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent

*1: For additional information, see “Fuel recommendation” later in this section.

*2: For additional information, see “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.

*3: For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” later in this section.

*4: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission

durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

*5: For hot areas, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 32°F (0°C).

*6: Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid or DEXRON

VI type ATF may also be used.

*7: Available in mainland US through a NISSAN dealer.

*8: For additional information, see “Vehicle identification” in this section for air conditioner specification label.

CAPACITIES AND

RECOMMENDED FUEL/

LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)

number (Research octane number 96).

If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded

regular gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI

number (Research octane number 91) may be

temporarily used, but only under the following

precautions:

쐌 Have the fuel tank filled only partially with

unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with

unleaded premium gasoline as soon as pos-

sible.

쐌 Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accelera-

tion.

However, for maximum vehicle perfor-

mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso-

line is recommended.

CAUTION

쐌 Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

the warranty coverage.

쐌 Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because

this will damage the three-way cata-

lyst.

쐌 Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is not designed to run

on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can

damage the fuel system components

and is not covered by the NISSAN

vehicle limited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets

the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-

cations where it is available. Many of the auto-

mobile manufacturers developed this specifica-

tion to improve emission control system and

vehicle performance. Ask your service station

manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC

specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-

lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially

designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN

supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-

gests that you use reformulated gasoline when

available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing

oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and metha-

nol with or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of

which the oxygenate content and the fuel com-

patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily

determined. If in doubt, ask your service station

manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take

the following precautions as the usage of such

fuels may cause vehicle performance problems

and/or fuel system damage.

쐌 The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

쐌 If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a

methanol blend, is used, it should con-

tain no more than 10% oxygenate.

(MTBE may, however, be added up to

15%.)

쐌 If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol (me-

thyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should

also contain a suitable amount of ap-

propriate cosolvents and corrosion in-

Technical and consumer information 9-3

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

hibitors. If not properly formulated with

appropriate cosolvents and corrosion

inhibitors, such methanol blends may

cause fuel system damage and/or ve-

hicle performance problems. At this

time, sufficient data is not available to

ensure that all methanol blends are

suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.

If any undesirable driveability problems such as

engine stalling and hard hot starting are experi-

enced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, imme-

diately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel

with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-

eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can

cause paint damage.

E-85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel

ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can

only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do

not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. U.S. govern-

ment regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing

pumps to be identified by a small, square, or-

ange and black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage for that

region.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any

aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel in-

jector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve de-

posit removers, etc.) which are sold commer-

cially. Many of these additives intended for gum,

varnish or deposit removal may contain active

solvents or similar ingredients that can be harm-

ful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can cause

persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark

knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-

vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you

detect a persistent heavy spark knock even

when using gasoline of the above stated

octane rating, or if you hear steady spark

knock while holding a steady speed on

level roads, have your dealer correct the

condition. Failure to correct the condition

is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN

is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking,

after-run or overheating. This in turn may cause

excessive fuel consumption or damage to the

engine. If any of the above symptoms are en-

countered, have your vehicle checked at a

NISSAN dealer or other competent service fa-

cility.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is no

cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

9-4 Technical and consumer information

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

쎻

API certification mark

쎻

API service symbol

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade,

quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satis-

factory engine life and performance. See “Ca-

pacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” ear-

lier in this section. NISSAN recommends the use

of an energy conserving oil in order to improve

fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the American

Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-

tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-

cosity standard. These oils have the API certifi-

cation mark on the front of the container. Oils

which do not have the specified quality label

should not be used as they could cause engine

damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not

necessary when the proper oil type is used and

maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has

been previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes

with temperature. Because of this, it is important

that the engine oil viscosity be selected based

on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be

operated before the next oil change. Choosing

an oil viscosity other than that recommended

could cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a

high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When

replacing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its

equivalent for the reason described in “Change

intervals”.

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your

engine are based on the use of the specified

quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than the

specified quality, or oil and filter change intervals

longer than recommended could reduce engine

life. Damage to engines caused by improper

maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter

quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the

new NISSAN vehicle limited warranties.

Your engine was filled with a high quality engine

STI0505

Technical and consumer information 9-5

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

oil when it was built. You do not have to change

the oil before the first recommended change

interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend

upon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions may

require more frequent oil and filter changes:

쐌 repeated short distance driving at cold out-

side temperatures

쐌 driving in dusty conditions

쐌 extensive idling

쐌 towing a trailer

쐌 stop and go commuting

Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance

Guide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN

vehicle must be charged with the refriger-

ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant,

NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or the

exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or lubri-

cant will cause severe damage to the air

conditioning system and will require the

replacement of all air conditioner sys-

tem components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earth’s ozone

layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect

the earth’s atmosphere, certain governmental

regulations require the recovery and recycling of

any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner

system service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained

technicians and equipment needed to recover

and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-

ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your

air conditioner system.

9-6 Technical and consumer information

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

ENGINE

Model VQ35HR

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle

Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 213.45 (3,498)

Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6*1

Idle speed rpm

See the emission control label on the

underside of the hood.

Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm

CO percentage at idle speed [No air] %

Spark plug Standard FXE22HR-11

Spark plug gap (Normal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

STI0425

*1: Cylinder number

SPECIFICATIONS

Technical and consumer information 9-7

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

WHEELS AND TIRES

Road wheel

Model Type Position Size

Offset

in (mm)

Coupe Aluminum

Front 18 x 8JJ 1.18 (30)

Rear 18 x 8-1/2JJ 1.30 (33)

Front 18 x 9JJ* 1.18 (30)

Rear 19 x 10JJ* 1.18 (30)

Roadster Aluminum

Front 18 x 8JJ 1.18 (30)

Rear 18 x 8-1/2JJ 1.30 (33)

Tire

Model Type Position Size Pressure (COLD)

Coupe

Conventional

Front 225/45R18 91W 240 kPa (35 psi)

Rear 245/45R18 96W 240 kPa (35 psi)

Front 245/40R18 93W* 240 kPa (35 psi)

Rear 265/35R19 94W* 240 kPa (35 psi)

Spare — T145/80D17 107M 420 kPa (60 psi)

Road-

ster

Conventional

Front 225/45R18 91W 240 kPa (35 psi)

Rear 245/45R18 96W 240 kPa (35 psi)

Spare — T145/80D17 107M 420 kPa (60 psi)

*: For option

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Vehicle body Coupe Roadster

Overall length in (mm) 169.8 (4,314) 169.8 (4,314)

Overall width in (mm) 71.5 (1,815) 71.5 (1,815)

Overall height in (mm) 52.1 (1,323) 52.5 (1,333)

Front tread in (mm) 60.5 (1,536) 60.5 (1,536)

Rear tread in (mm)

60.6 (1,540)*1

60.9 (1,546)*2

60.6 (1,540)

Wheelbase in (mm) 104.3 (2,650) 104.3 (2,650)

Gross vehicle weight rating

(GVWR)

lb (kg)

See the F.M.V.S.S. or C.M.V.S.S. cer-

tification label on the driver’s side

lock pillar.

Gross axle weight rating

(GAWR)

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)

*1: For model with 245/45R 18 tires

*2: For model with 265/35R 19 tires

9-8 Technical and consumer information

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

When planning to travel in another country,

you should first find out if the fuel available is

suitable for your vehicle’s engine.

Using fuel with too low an octane rating may

cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles

must be operated with unleaded engine gaso-

line. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas

where appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your

vehicle to another country, state, province

or district, it may be necessary to modify the

vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-

sion control and safety standards vary according

to the country, state, province or district; there-

fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district

and registered, its modifications, transpor-

tation, and registration are the responsibil-

ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible

for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is at-

tached as shown. This number is the identifica-

tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle

registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown.

STI0320 STI0513

WHEN TRAVELING OR

REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN

ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

Technical and consumer information 9-9

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

(F.M.V.S.S.) or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is af-

fixed as shown. This label contains valuable

vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle

Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review

it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is at-

tached as shown.

STI0516 STI0322 STI0514

9-10 Technical and consumer information

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire inflation pressure is shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the

driver side center pillar.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixed

inside of the hood as shown.

STI0366 STI0515

Technical and consumer information 9-11

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Use the following steps to mount the license

plate:

Before mounting the license plate, confirm that

the following parts are enclosed in the vinyl bag.

쐌 License plate bracket

쐌 J-nut x 2

쐌 Screw x 2

쐌 Screw grommet x 2

1. Temporarily place the license plate bracket

while aligning points

쎻

of the front bumper

fascia with holes

쎻

in the license plate

bracket.

2. Remove the license plate bracket.

3. Carefully drill two shallow pilot holes

쎻

using a 0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at the marked

locations. (Be sure that the drill only goes

through the fascia, or damage to the nut

may occur.)

4. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia.

5. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the grom-

met hole to add 90° turn onto the part

쎻

6. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket

before placing the license plate bracket on

the fascia.

7. Install the license plate bracket with screws.

STI0446

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE

PLATE

9-12 Technical and consumer information

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

8. Install the license plate with bolts that are no

longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).

WARNING

쐌 It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside a

vehicle. In a collision, people

riding in these areas are more

likely to be seriously injured or

killed.

쐌 Do not allow people to ride in

any area of your vehicle that is

not equipped with seats and

seat belts.

쐌 Be sure everyone in your ve-

hicle is in a seat and using a

seat belt properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with

the following terms before loading your

vehicle:

쐌 Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle) - vehicle weight including:

standard and optional equipment, flu-

ids, emergency tools, and spare tire

assembly. This weight does not in-

clude passengers and cargo.

쐌 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight of

passengers and cargo.

쐌 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) - maximum total combined weight

of the unloaded vehicle, passengers,

luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and

any other optional equipment. This in-

formation is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

쐌 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit specified

for the front or rear axle. This informa-

tion is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

쐌 GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

Rating) - maximum total weight rating

of the vehicle, passengers, cargo and

trailer.

쐌 Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,

VEHICLE LOADING

INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 9-13

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Total load capacity - maximum total

weight limit specified of the load (pas-

sengers and cargo) for the vehicle.

This is the maximum combined weight

of occupants and cargo that can be

loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is

used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue

weight must be included as part of the

cargo load. This information is located

on the Tire and Loading Information

label.

쐌 Cargo capacity - permissible weight of

cargo, the subtracted weight of occu-

pants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your

vehicle shown as “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and

Loading Information label. Do not exceed

the number of occupants shown as

“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-

ing Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo”, add the weight of all

occupants, then add the total luggage

weight. Examples are shown in the fol-

lowing illustration.

9-14

Technical and consumer information

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Steps for determining correct load

limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on

your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kg or

XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if the XXX

amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will

be five 150 lb. passengers in your

vehicle, the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs) or

(640 − 340 (5 × 70) = 300 kg)

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not safely

exceed the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity calculated in Step

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be trans-

ferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this reduces

the available cargo and luggage load

capacity of your vehicle.

STI0447

Technical and consumer information 9-15

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your

vehicle. See “Measurement of Weights”

later in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-

sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label.

LOADING TIPS

쐌 The GVW must not exceed GVWR or

GAWR as specified on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-

bel.

쐌 Do not load the front and rear axle to

the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the

GVWR.

WARNING

쐌 Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent

it from sliding or shifting. Do

not place cargo higher than the

seatbacks. In a sudden stop or

collision, unsecured cargo

could cause personal injury.

쐌 Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear

GAWRs. If you do, parts of your

vehicle can break, tire damage

could occur, or it can change

the way your vehicle handles.

This could result in loss of con-

trol and cause personal injury.

쐌 Overloading not only could

shorten the life of your vehicle

and the tire, but can also cause

unsafe vehicle handling and

long braking distances. This

may cause a premature tire fail-

ure, which could result in a se-

rious accident and personal in-

jury. Failures caused by over

loading are not covered by the

vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight

shifts that could affect the balance of

your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded,

drive to a scale and weigh the front and

the rear wheels separately to determine

axle loads. Individual axle loads should

not exceed either of the gross axle weight

ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle

loads should not exceed the gross ve-

hicle weight rating (GVWR). These rat-

ings are given on the vehicle certification

label. If weight ratings are exceeded,

move or remove items to bring all weights

below the ratings.

9-16

Technical and consumer information

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Roadster model:

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.

Coupe model:

Your new vehicle was designed to be used

primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Re-

member that towing a trailer places additional

loads on your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steer-

ing, braking and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available

on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This

guide includes information on trailer towing ca-

pability and the special equipment required for

proper towing.

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of a

trailer and its cargo can adversely affect

vehicle handling, braking and perfor-

mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

쐌 Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy

load for the first 500 miles (800 km).

Your engine, axle or other parts

could be damaged.

쐌 For the first 500 miles (800 km) that

you tow a trailer, do not drive over 50

mph (80 km/h) and do not make

starts at full throttle. This helps the

engine and other parts of your ve-

hicle wear in at the heavier loads.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed 1,000

lb (454 kg). The total trailer load equals trailer

weight plus its cargo weight. Towing loads

greater than 1,000 lb (454 kg) or using improper

towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle

handling, braking and performance.

The ability of a vehicle to tow a trailer is not only

related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the

places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate

for level highway driving may have to be reduced

on very steep grades or in low traction situations

(for example, on slippery boat ramps).

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from im-

proper towing procedures are not cov-

ered by NISSAN warranties.

TOWING A TRAILER

Technical and consumer information 9-17

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Tongue load

Keep the tongue load between 9 and 11% of the

total trailer load within the maximum tongue load

limits shown in the following Towing

Load/Specification chart. If the tongue load be-

comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for

proper tongue load.

Maximum gross vehicle weight/

maximum gross axle weight

The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle

must not exceed. GVWR shown on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The

gross vehicle weight equals the combined

weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers,

luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other

optional equipment. In addition, front or rear

gross axle weight must not exceed GAWR

shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART

Unit: lb (kg)

MAXIMUM

TOWING LOAD

1,000 (454)

MAXIMUM

TONGUE LOAD

100 (45.4)

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for a vehicle and trailer.

Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to

the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or

property damage due to sway caused by cross-

winds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight

rating for your trailer:

쐌 The required hitch ball size is stamped on

most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also

have the size printed on top of the ball.

쐌 Choose the proper class hitch ball based on

the trailer weight.

쐌 The diameter of the threaded shank of the

hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount

hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should be

TI1011M TI1012M

9-18 Technical and consumer information

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

no more than 1/16″ smaller than the hole in

the ball mount.

쐌 The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be

long enough to be properly secured to the

ball mount. There should be at least 2 threads

showing beyond the lock washer and nut.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers

of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).

You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment to

the vehicle that has a 2,000 lb (909 kg) maxi-

mum weight rating, but your vehicle is only

capable of towing the maximum trailer weights

shown in the Towing Load/Specification Chart

earlier in this section.

CAUTION

쐌 Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

쐌 The hitch should not be attached to

or affect the operation of the impact-

absorbing bumper.

쐌 Do not modify the vehicle exhaust

system, brake system, etc. to install a

trailer hitch.

쐌 To reduce the possibility of addi-

tional damage if a vehicle is struck

from the rear, where practical, re-

move the hitch and/or receiver when

not in use.

쐌 After the hitch is removed, seal the

bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes,

water or dust from entering the pas-

senger compartment.

쐌 Regularly check that all trailer hitch

mounting bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures

쐌 When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-

hicle tires to the recommended cold

tire pressure indicated on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

쐌 Trailer tire condition, size, load rating

and proper inflation pressure should

be in accordance with the trailer and

tire manufacturers’ specifications.

Safety chains

Always use a suitable chain between a vehicle

and the trailer. The safety chain should be

crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not

to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave

enough slack in the chain to permit turning

corners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electrical

system, a commercially available

power-type module/converter must be

used to provide power for all trailer

lighting. This unit uses the vehicle bat-

tery as a direct power source for all

trailer lights while using the vehicle tail

light, stoplight and turn signal circuits

as a signal source. The module/

converter must draw no more than 15

milliamps from the stop and tail lamp

circuits. Using a module/converter that

exceeds these power requirements may

damage the vehicle’s electrical system.

See a reputable trailer dealer to obtain

Technical and consumer information 9-19

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

the proper equipment and to have it

installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or

local regulations. When wiring the vehicle for

towing, connect the stop and tail light pickup

into the vehicle electrical circuit at a point be-

tween the sensor and stop light or light switch.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,

make sure it conforms to federal and/or local

regulations and that it is properly installed.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system

directly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips

쐌 Be certain a vehicle maintains a level position

when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is

hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an

unusual nose-up or nose-down condition;

check for improper tongue load, overload,

worn suspension or other possible causes of

these conditions.

쐌 Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shifts while driving.

쐌 Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the

trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in

the back half.

쐌 Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, vehicle

tire pressure, trailer light operation, and trailer

wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer

to the vehicle.

쐌 Be certain your rear view mirrors conform to

all federal, state and/or local regulations. If

not, install any mirrors required for towing

before driving the vehicle.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the

vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,

stopping and backing up in an area which is free

from traffic. Steering stability, and braking per-

formance will be somewhat different than under

normal driving conditions.

쐌 Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shift while driving.

쐌 Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

쐌 Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

쐌 Always drive a vehicle at a moderate speed.

Some states or provinces have specific

speed limits for vehicles that are towing

trailers. Obey the local speed limits.

쐌 When backing up, hold the bottom of the

steering wheel with one hand. Move your

hand in the direction in which you want the

trailer to go. Make small corrections and back

up slowly. If possible, have someone guide

you when you are backing up.

쐌 Always block the wheels on both vehicle and

trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not

recommended; however, if you must do so,

and if a vehicle is equipped with automatic

transmission, first apply the parking brake

and block the wheels, and then move the

transmission selector lever into the P (Park)

position. If you move the selector lever to the

P (Park) position before blocking the wheels

and applying the parking brake, the transmis-

sion may get damaged.

쐌 When going down a hill, shift into a lower

gear and use the engine braking effect.

When going up a long grade, downshift the

transmission to a lower gear and reduce

speed to reduce chances of engine overload-

ing and/or overheating.

쐌 If the engine coolant rises to an extremely

high temperature when the air conditioning

system is on, turn off the air conditioner.

Coolant heat can be additionally vented by

9-20 Technical and consumer information

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

opening the windows, switching the fan con-

trol to high and setting the temperature con-

trol to the HOT position.

쐌 Trailer towing consumes more fuel than nor-

mal circumstances.

쐌 Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles

(800 km).

쐌 Have a vehicle serviced more often than at

intervals specified in the recommended main-

tenance schedule.

쐌 When making a turn, your trailer wheels will

be closer to the inside of the turn than your

vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make

a larger than normal turning radius during the

turn.

쐌 Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely

affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-

ing vehicle sway. When being passed by

larger vehicles, be prepared for possible

changes in crosswinds that could affect ve-

hicle handling. If swaying does occur, firmly

grip the steering wheel, steer straight ahead,

and immediately (but gradually) reduce ve-

hicle speed. This combination will help stabi-

lize the vehicle. Never increase speed.

쐌 Be careful when passing other vehicles.

Passing while towing a trailer requires con-

siderably more distance than normal passing.

Remember the length of the trailer must also

pass the other vehicle before you can safely

change lanes.

쐌 To maintain engine braking efficiency and

electrical charging performance, do not use

6th gear (manual transmission) or 5th posi-

tion (automatic transmission).

쐌 Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long

or too frequently. This could cause the brakes

to overheat, resulting in reduced braking ef-

ficiency.

쐌 Increase your following distance to allow for

greater stopping distances while towing a

trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

쐌 Do not use cruise control while towing a

trailer.

쐌 Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-

nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50

miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

쐌 When stopped in traffic for long periods of

time in hot weather, put the vehicle in the P

(Park) position.

When towing a trailer, change transmis-

sion oil more frequently. For additional

information, see the “8. Maintenance and

do-it-yourself” section.

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground is sometimes called flat towing. This

method is sometimes used when towing a ve-

hicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a

motor home.

CAUTION

쐌 Failure to follow these guidelines

can result in severe transmission

damage.

쐌 Whenever flat towing your vehicle,

always tow forward, never backward.

쐌 DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-

sion vehicle with all four wheels on

the ground (flat towing). Doing so

WILL DAMAGE internal transmission

parts due to lack of transmission lu-

brication.

쐌 For emergency towing procedures,

refer to “Towing recommended by

NISSAN” in the “6. In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual.

FLAT TOWING

Technical and consumer information 9-21

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic

transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST

be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive

wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s

recommendations when using their product.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

쐌 Always tow with the manual transmission in

Neutral.

쐌 After towing 500 miles, start and idle the

engine with the transmission in Neutral for

two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after

every 500 miles of towing may cause damage

to internal transmission parts.

DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality

Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to

federal safety requirements in addition to these

grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable

on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and

maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified gov-

ernment test course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times

as well on the government course as a tire

graded 100. The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions of their use,

however, and may depart significantly from the

norm due to variations in driving habits, service

practices and differences in road characteristics

and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the

tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-

sured under controlled conditions on specified

government test surfaces of asphalt and con-

crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction

performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire

is based on straight-ahead braking trac-

tion tests, and does not include accel-

eration, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled conditions on a

specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-

tained high temperature can cause the material

of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire

failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of

performance which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard

No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels

of performance on the laboratory test wheel than

the minimum required by law.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY

GRADING

9-22 Technical and consumer information

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, under-inflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in combi-

nation, can cause heat build-up and

possible tire failure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following

emission warranties.

For US:

쐌 Emission Defects Warranty

쐌 Emissions Performance Warranty

(See Warranty Information Booklet for de-

tails.)

For Canada:

쐌 Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet that comes with your NISSAN

vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet, or it has become lost, you may

obtain a replacement by writing to:

쐌 Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

쐌 Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National High-

way Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) in addition to notifying

NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it

finds that a safety defect exists in a

group of vehicles, it may order a recall

and remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved in in-

dividual problems between you, your

dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-

9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;

or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400

Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC

20590. You can also obtain other in-

formation about motor vehicle safety

from http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting

our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

(US only)

Technical and consumer information 9-23

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-

7261).

Due to legal requirements in some states/

areas, your vehicle may be required to be in what

is called the “ready condition” for an Inspection/

Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control

system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when

it is driven through certain driving patterns.

Usually, the “ready condition” can be obtained

by ordinary usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or

the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be

reset to a not “ready condition”. Before taking

the I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/

maintenance test readiness condition. Turn the

ignition switch ON without starting the engine. If

the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on

steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10

seconds, the I/M test condition is “not ready”. If

the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M

test condition is “ready”.

If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not ready”

condition, drive the vehicle through the following

pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition.

If you cannot or do not want to perform the

driving pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it

for you.

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe and

prudent manner according to traffic

conditions and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine. Allow the engine to idle until

the engine coolant temperature gauge needle

points between the C and H (normal operat-

ing temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h),

then quickly release the accelerator pedal

completely and keep it released for at least

10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a

moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of

53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for at least 9

minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine running.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)

and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 10 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)

and maintain the speed for at least 3 minutes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the automatic trans-

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US

only)

9-24 Technical and consumer information

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

mission gear selector lever in the P (Park) or

N (Neutral) position or the manual transmis-

sion shift lever in the N position.

9. Turn the engine off.

10. Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one more

time.

If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat the

preceding step. Any safe driving mode is ac-

ceptable between steps. Do not stop the engine

until step 7 is completed.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data

Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is

to record, in certain crash or near crash-like

situations, such as an air bag deployment or

hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in

understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-

formed. The EDR is designed to record data

related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems

for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or

less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to

record such data as:

쐌 How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

쐌 Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

쐌 How far (if at all) the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

쐌 How fast the vehicle was traveling.

쐌 Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better under-

standing of the circumstances in which crashes

and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle

only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data

are recorded by the EDR under normal driving

conditions and no personal data (e.g. name,

gender, age and crash location) are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforce-

ment, could combine the EDR data with the type

of personally identifying data routinely acquired

during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required and access to the vehicle

or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle

manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties,

such as law enforcement, that have the special

equipment, can read the information if they have

access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will

only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle

owner or lessee or as otherwise required or

permitted by law.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

Technical and consumer information 9-25

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best

source of service and repair information for your

vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations

and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment

procedures, this manual is the same one used by

the factory trained technicians working at

NISSAN dealerships. Also available are genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, and genuine

NISSAN Service and Owner’s Manuals for older

NISSAN models.

For USA:

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model

year and later, contact:

1-800-450-9491

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model

year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

1-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year

and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada:

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN

Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, please con-

tact a NISSAN dealer. For the phone number

and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area call

the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-

0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will

assist you.

Also available are Genuine NISSAN Service and

Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely

event, there is some important information you

should know.

Many insurance companies routinely authorize

the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to

cut costs, among other reasons.

Insist on the use of Genuine NISSAN

Collision Parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored using

parts made to NISSAN’s original exacting speci-

fications — if you want to help it to last and hold

its resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your

insurance agent and your repair shop to

only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.

NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,

nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damage

caused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect

your personal safety, preserve your warranty

protection and maintain the resale value of your

vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using

Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit

unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at

the end of your lease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones

to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate

the windshield of your vehicle in an accident.

Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide

such built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine

parts often show premature wear, rust and cor-

rosion.

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must be

advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair

your vehicle. And some states have enacted

laws that restrict insurance companies from

authorizing the use of non-genuine collision

parts during the new vehicle warranty. These

laws help protect you, so you can take action to

protect yourself.

It’s your right!

If you should need further information visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

9-26 Technical and consumer information

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

MEMO

Technical and consumer information 9-27

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

MEMO

9-28 Technical and consumer information

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

10 Index

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)........................... 5-21

Advanced air bag system........................................ 1-35

Air bag system

Advanced Air Bag System............................... 1-35

Front passenger air bag and status light ..... 1-36

Air bag warning labels ............................................. 1-42

Air bag warning light .................................... 1-43, 2-14

Air cleaner .................................................................. 8-18

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation..................................... 4-9

Air conditioner service ............................. 4-9, 4-12

Air conditioner specification label .................. 9-11

Air conditioning system refrigerant and

lubricant recommendations..................... 4-12, 9-6

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)............ 4-9

Alarm, How to stop alarm (see vehicle security

system)......................................................................... 2-19

Alcohol, drugs and driving......................................... 5-6

Anchor point location, Top tether strap .............. 1-24

Antenna........................................................................ 4-30

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)........................... 5-21

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

light ............................................................................... 2-11

Appearance care

Exterior appearance care .................................... 7-2

Interior appearance care ..................................... 7-5

Audible reminders ..................................................... 2-17

Audio operation precautions .................................. 4-14

Audio system.............................................................. 4-12

Steering wheel audio controls ........................ 4-29

Autochanger

Compact Disc (CD)........................................... 4-26

Automatic

Anti-glare inside mirror...................................... 3-26

Automatic adjusting function (front

windows)............................................................... 2-40

Automatic passenger seatback tilt

function......................................................... 1-5, 3-17

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ................ 8-12

Driving with automatic transmission ..... 5-7, 5-10

Avoiding collision and rollover.................................. 5-5

Battery.......................................................................... 8-15

Battery saver system ......................................... 2-25

Keyfob.................................................................... 8-24

Before starting the engine......................................... 5-9

Belts (See drive belts) ............................................. 8-17

Booster seats ............................................................. 1-25

Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System with

NISSAN Voice Recognition .................................. 4-31

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .................... 5-21

Brake and clutch fluid ....................................... 8-13

Brake fluid............................................................. 8-13

Brake system ....................................................... 5-21

Parking brake operation.................................... 5-15

Warning light ....................................................... 2-12

Break-in schedule ..................................................... 5-18

Brightness control, Instrument panel ................... 2-26

Bulb check/instrument panel.................................. 2-11

Bulb replacement ...................................................... 8-26

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants...... 9-2

Car phone or CB radio............................................ 4-31

Cargo (See vehicle loading information)............. 2-33

Cargo net .................................................................... 2-33

Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst ................. 5-3

CD care and cleaning.............................................. 4-29

Child restraints........................................................... 1-17

Booster seats ...................................................... 1-25

Installation on front passenger seat ............. 1-20

Precautions on child restraints........................ 1-17

Top tether strap .................................................. 1-24

Top tether strap anchor point location ......... 1-24

Child safety ................................................................. 1-12

Chimes, Audible reminders..................................... 2-17

Circuit breaker, Fusible link .................................... 8-23

Cleaning exterior and interior .......................... 7-2, 7-5

Clock ............................................................................ 2-30

Clutch fluid.................................................................. 8-13

Coat hook .................................................................. 2-38

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

Cold weather driving ................................................ 5-25

Command (See Bluetooth

Hands-Free

Phone System)........................................................... 4-37

Compact Disc (CD) changer (See audio

system)......................................................................... 4-26

Compact Disc (CD) player (See audio

system)......................................................................... 4-21

Compact spare tire................................................... 8-40

Console box................................................................ 2-35

Control panel buttons (models with navigation

system) ........................................................................... 4-2

Controls

Control panel buttons (display with

navigation system) ................................................ 4-2

Heater and air conditioner controls

(automatic) .............................................................. 4-9

Steering wheel audio controls ........................ 4-29

Coolant

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants................................................................. 9-2

Changing engine coolant.................................... 8-9

Checking engine coolant level........................... 8-8

Corrosion protection ................................................... 7-6

Cruise control............................................................. 5-16

Cup holders ................................................................ 2-33

Daytime running light system ................................. 2-25

Defroster switch, Rear window and outside

mirror defroster switch............................................. 2-23

Dimensions and weights............................................ 9-8

Display controls (See control panel buttons),

With navigation system .............................................. 4-2

Door open warning light.......................................... 2-12

Drive belts ................................................................... 8-17

Driving

Cold weather driving ......................................... 5-25

Driving with automatic transmission ..... 5-7, 5-10

Driving with manual transmission .......... 5-7, 5-13

Precautions when starting and driving ............ 5-2

Economy, Fuel............................................................ 5-18

Elapsed time............................................................... 2-10

Emission control information label ........................ 9-10

Emission control system warranty......................... 9-23

Engine

Before starting the engine .................................. 5-9

Break-in schedule............................................... 5-18

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants................................................................. 9-2

Changing engine coolant.................................... 8-9

Changing engine oil and filter ......................... 8-10

Checking engine coolant level........................... 8-8

Checking engine oil level .................................... 8-9

Coolant temperature gauge ............................... 2-5

Engine block heater ........................................... 5-26

Engine compartment check locations.............. 8-7

Engine cooling system......................................... 8-8

Engine oil................................................................. 8-9

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation......... 9-5

Engine oil viscosity ............................................... 9-5

Engine serial number ......................................... 9-10

Engine specifications ........................................... 9-7

If your vehicle overheats...................................... 6-9

Oil pressure gauge ............................................... 2-7

Starting the engine ............................................... 5-9

Event data recorders................................................ 9-25

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).............................. 5-2

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label............. 9-10

Filter, Changing engine oil and filter .................... 8-10

Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch)... 2-27

Flat tire............................................................................ 6-2

Flat towing .................................................................. 9-21

Floor mat cleaning ....................................................... 7-5

Fluid

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ................ 8-12

Brake and clutch fluid ....................................... 8-13

Brake fluid............................................................. 8-13

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants................................................................. 9-2

Engine coolant ....................................................... 8-8

Engine oil................................................................. 8-9

Power steering fluid ........................................... 8-12

Window washer fluid......................................... 8-14

FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD)

player............................................................................ 4-19

FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)

changer........................................................................ 4-23

Front manual seat adjustment ................................. 1-3

Front power seat adjustment .................................. 1-3

Front passenger air bag and status light............ 1-36

Front power seat adjustment.................................... 1-4

Front seat active head restraints ......................... 1-10

Fuel

Average fuel consumption .................................. 2-9

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

10-2

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants................................................................. 9-2

Distance to empty................................................. 2-9

Fuel economy ...................................................... 5-18

Fuel octane rating ................................................. 9-3

Fuel recommendation........................................... 9-3

Fuel-filler cap ....................................................... 3-23

Fuel-filler door...................................................... 3-23

Gauge ...................................................................... 2-6

Fuses............................................................................ 8-21

Fusible links ................................................................ 8-23

Garage door opener, HomeLink

Universal

Transceiver.................................................................. 2-43

Gas cap ....................................................................... 3-23

Gauge............................................................................. 2-3

Engine coolant temperature gauge .................. 2-5

Engine oil pressure gauge.................................. 2-7

Fuel gauge .............................................................. 2-6

Odometer ................................................................ 2-4

Speedometer.......................................................... 2-4

Tachometer............................................................. 2-5

Trip computer......................................................... 2-8

Volt meter................................................................ 2-8

General maintenance.................................................. 8-2

Golf bag stowing....................................................... 2-37

Hatch, Rear hatch........................................................ 3-9

Hazard warning flasher switch............................... 2-27

Head restraints ............................................................. 1-9

Headlights

Bulb replacement ............................................... 8-27

Headlight switch ................................................. 2-24

Xenon headlights ................................................ 2-24

Heated seats .............................................................. 2-28

Heater

Engine block heater ........................................... 5-26

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)............ 4-9

HomeLink

Universal Transceiver ......................... 2-43

Hood release ................................................................ 3-8

Hook, Coat hook ....................................................... 2-38

Horn.............................................................................. 2-27

Ignition switch............................................................... 5-6

Automatic transmission models ............. 5-7, 5-10

Key positions .......................................................... 5-8

Manual transmission models .................. 5-7, 5-13

Immobilizer system .................................................... 2-19

Indicator lights............................................................ 2-15

Inside

Automatic anti-glare mirror............................... 3-26

Mirror...................................................................... 3-26

Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test ........................ 9-24

Instrument brightness control ................................ 2-26

Instrument panel........................................................... 2-2

Instrument pocket...................................................... 2-32

Interior light replacement......................................... 8-28

Interior lights ............................................................... 2-41

Interior trunk lid release ........................................... 3-11

Jump starting................................................................. 6-7

Keyfob battery replacement.................................... 8-24

Keyless entry (See remote keyless entry

system) ........................................................................... 3-5

Keys................................................................................. 3-2

Labels

Air bag warning labels ...................................... 1-42

Air conditioner specification label .................. 9-11

Emission control information label ................. 9-10

Engine serial number ......................................... 9-10

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 9-10

Tire and Loading Information label..... 8-32, 9-11

Vehicle identification number (VIN) .................. 9-9

License plate, Installing front license plate......... 9-12

Light

Air bag warning light ......................................... 1-43

Bulb replacement ............................................... 8-26

Headlight switch ................................................. 2-24

Headlights bulb replacement........................... 8-27

Indicator lights ..................................................... 2-15

Interior lights ........................................................ 2-41

Luggage compartment light............................. 2-42

Map lights ............................................................. 2-41

Replacement........................................................ 8-26

Room light ............................................................ 2-41

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

10-3

Trunk light ............................................................. 2-42

Vanity mirror light................................................ 2-42

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders .............................................................. 2-11

Xenon headlights ................................................ 2-24

Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement ... 8-28

Loading information (See vehicle loading

information) ................................................................. 9-13

Lock

Door locks............................................................... 3-3

Power door lock .................................................... 3-3

Rear floor box ...................................................... 2-35

Rear hatch lock...................................................... 3-9

Top latch lever..................................................... 3-16

Trunk lid................................................................. 3-10

Low tire pressure warning light ............................. 2-13

Low tire pressure warning system (See tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS))..................... 5-3

Luggage compartment light.................................... 2-42

Maintenance

Battery ................................................................... 8-15

General maintenance ........................................... 8-2

Inside the vehicle................................................... 8-3

Maintenance information (display) .................... 4-3

Maintenance precautions .................................... 8-5

Maintenance requirements.................................. 8-2

Outside the vehicle............................................... 8-2

Seat belt maintenance ...................................... 1-17

Under the hood and vehicle............................... 8-4

Malfunction indicator light (MIL)............................ 2-15

Map lights.................................................................... 2-41

Meter, Trip computer .................................................. 2-8

Meters and gauges ..................................................... 2-3

Meters and gauges, Instrument brightness

control .......................................................................... 2-26

Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror .................. 3-26

Inside mirror ......................................................... 3-26

Outside mirrors ................................................... 3-27

Net

Cargo net.............................................................. 2-33

Ventilated net seats .............................................. 1-6

New vehicle break-in................................................ 5-18

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System................... 2-19

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System, Engine

start.................................................................................. 5-8

Odometer....................................................................... 2-4

Oil

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants................................................................. 9-2

Changing engine oil and filter ......................... 8-10

Checking engine oil level .................................... 8-9

Engine oil................................................................. 8-9

Engine oil pressure gauge.................................. 2-7

Engine oil viscosity ............................................... 9-5

Opening the soft top................................................ 3-13

Outside air temperature display............................... 2-9

Outside mirrors .......................................................... 3-27

Overheat, If your vehicle overheats......................... 6-9

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information................................................................... 9-26

Parking

Brake break-in ..................................................... 5-21

Parking brake operation.................................... 5-15

Parking on hills .................................................... 5-19

Phone, Car phone or CB radio ............................. 4-31

Power

Front seat adjustment .......................................... 1-4

Power door lock .................................................... 3-3

Power outlet......................................................... 2-31

Power steering fluid ........................................... 8-12

Power steering system...................................... 5-20

Power windows................................................... 2-39

Precautions

Audio operation................................................... 4-14

Braking precautions ........................................... 5-21

Child restraints .................................................... 1-17

Cruise control ...................................................... 5-16

Maintenance ........................................................... 8-5

Seat belt usage................................................... 1-10

Supplemental restraint system ........................ 1-28

When starting and driving .................................. 5-2

Push starting ................................................................. 6-9

Radio ............................................................................ 4-12

Car phone or CB radio..................................... 4-31

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

10-4

FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD)

changer ................................................................. 4-23

FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD)

player ..................................................................... 4-19

Steering wheel audio controls ........................ 4-29

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)

test (US only) ............................................................. 9-24

Rear floor box............................................................. 2-35

Rear hatch ..................................................................... 3-9

Rear hatch opener....................................................... 3-9

Rear parcel box ......................................................... 2-37

Rear power point....................................................... 2-31

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch ........................................................................... 2-23

Rear window wiper and washer switch .............. 2-22

Recorders, Event data ............................................. 9-25

Registering your vehicle in another country.......... 9-9

Remote keyless entry system ................................... 3-5

Reporting safety defects (US only) ...................... 9-23

Rollover........................................................................... 5-5

Roof, Soft top............................................................. 3-13

Room light................................................................... 2-41

Safety

Child seat belts ................................................... 1-12

Reporting safety defects (US only)................ 9-23

Towing safety....................................................... 9-18

Seat adjustment, Front power seat

adjustment ..................................................................... 1-4

Seat belt(s)

Child safety .......................................................... 1-12

Infants .................................................................... 1-13

Injured persons.................................................... 1-14

Larger children .................................................... 1-13

Precautions on seat belt usage ...................... 1-10

Pregnant women................................................. 1-13

Seat belt cleaning ................................................. 7-6

Seat belt extenders ............................................ 1-16

Seat belt maintenance ...................................... 1-17

Seat belt warning light ...................................... 2-14

Seat belts ............................................................. 1-10

Seat belts with pretensioners ........................ 1-41

Shoulder belt arm ............................................... 1-16

Small children ...................................................... 1-13

Three-point type with retractor ....................... 1-14

Seat lever, Tilting passenger’s seat ........................ 1-7

Seat(s)

Heated seats........................................................ 2-28

Seats ........................................................................ 1-2

Ventilated net seats .............................................. 1-6

Seatback tilt cancel switch ....................................... 1-8

Secondary rear hatch release................................ 3-10

Secondary trunk lid release.................................... 3-12

Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System), Engine start ............................................... 2-19

Security system, Vehicle security system ........... 2-18

Selector lever, Shift lock release .......................... 5-13

Servicing air conditioner................................. 4-9, 4-12

Shift lock release, Transmission ............................ 5-13

Shifting

Automatic transmission ............................ 5-7, 5-10

Manual transmission ................................. 5-7, 5-13

Shoulder belt arm...................................................... 1-16

Soft top, Care and cleaning ..................................... 7-3

Soft top, If the top does not open or close....... 3-19

Soft top, Soft top indicator light................ 2-17, 3-17

Soft top, Soft top operation ................................... 3-13

Spare tire ....................................................................... 9-8

Spark plugs................................................................. 8-17

Speed, Speed indicator ............................................. 2-9

Speedometer ................................................................ 2-4

Starting

Before starting the engine .................................. 5-9

Jump starting .......................................................... 6-7

Precautions when starting and driving ............ 5-2

Push starting .......................................................... 6-9

Starting the engine ............................................... 5-9

Status light, Front passenger air bag .................. 1-36

Steering

Power steering fluid ........................................... 8-12

Power steering system...................................... 5-20

Steering wheel switch for audio controls..... 4-29

Tilting steering wheel......................................... 3-25

Stopwatch................................................................... 2-10

Storage ........................................................................ 2-32

Stowing golf bags..................................................... 2-37

Sun visors ................................................................... 3-25

Sunglasses holder .................................................... 2-32

Supplemental air bag warning labels................... 1-42

Supplemental air bag warning light .......... 1-43, 2-14

Supplemental restraint system............................... 1-28

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system.................................................................... 1-28

Switch

Audio control steering wheel switch ............. 4-29

Hazard warning flasher switch ........................ 2-27

Headlight switch ................................................. 2-24

Ignition switch ........................................................ 5-6

Ignition switch automatic transmission

models.......................................................... 5-7, 5-10

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

10-5

Ignition switch manual transmission

models.......................................................... 5-7, 5-13

Power door lock switch....................................... 3-4

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch..................................................................... 2-23

Traction control system (TCS) off switch .... 2-29

Turn signal switch .............................................. 2-26

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch... 2-29

Tachometer.................................................................... 2-5

Temperature display.................................................... 2-9

Temperature gauge, Engine coolant

temperature gauge ...................................................... 2-5

Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),

Engine start................................................................. 2-19

Three-way catalyst....................................................... 5-3

Tilting passenger’s seat ............................................. 1-7

Tilting steering wheel ............................................... 3-25

Tire pressure, Low tire pressure warning

light ............................................................................... 2-13

Tires

Flat tire ..................................................................... 6-2

Low tire pressure warning system.................... 5-3

Spare tire .............................................................. 8-40

Tire and Loading information label................. 8-32

Tire and Loading Information label................. 9-11

Tire chains ............................................................ 8-37

Tire dressing........................................................... 7-4

Tire pressure ........................................................ 8-30

Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS)............................................................ 5-3, 6-2

Tire rotation .......................................................... 8-37

Types of tires ....................................................... 8-36

Uniform tire quality grading.............................. 9-22

Wheel/tire size ....................................................... 9-8

Wheels and tires ................................................ 8-30

Top tether strap child restraints ............................ 1-24

Top, Soft top .............................................................. 3-13

Towing

Flat towing............................................................ 9-21

Tow truck towing ................................................ 6-10

Towing a trailer.................................................... 9-17

Towing load/specification chart...................... 9-17

Towing safety....................................................... 9-18

TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system................ 5-3

TPMS, Tire pressure warning system..................... 6-2

Traction control system (TCS)............................... 5-23

Traction control system (TCS) off switch........... 2-29

Trailer towing.............................................................. 9-17

Transceiver, HomeLink

Universal

Transceiver.................................................................. 2-43

Transmission

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ................ 8-12

Driving with automatic transmission ..... 5-7, 5-10

Driving with manual transmission .......... 5-7, 5-13

Transmission selector lever lock release...... 5-13

Transmitter (See remote keyless entry system)... 3-5

Traveling or registering your vehicle in another

country............................................................................ 9-9

Trip computer ............................................................... 2-8

Trip odometer............................................................. 2-10

Trunk

Interior trunk lid release .................................... 3-11

Light ....................................................................... 2-42

Secondary trunk lid release ............................. 3-12

Trunk lid................................................................. 3-10

Turn signal switch ..................................................... 2-26

Underbody cleaning .................................................... 7-3

Uniform tire quality grading .................................... 9-22

Up-shift indicator (M/T models) ............................ 5-14

Up-shift indicator setting (rpm) (M/T models)... 2-10

Vanity mirror light ...................................................... 2-42

Vehicle

Dimensions and weights ..................................... 9-8

Identification number (VIN) ................................. 9-9

Loading information............................................ 9-13

Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ................. 6-12

Security system................................................... 2-18

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch... 2-29

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system ........ 5-23

Ventilated net seats..................................................... 1-6

Ventilators ...................................................................... 4-8

Voice command (See Bluetooth

Hands-Free

Phone System)........................................................... 4-37

Volt meter ...................................................................... 2-8

Warning labels, Air bag warning labels .............. 1-42

Warning light

Air bag warning light.............................. 1-43, 2-14

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning

light......................................................................... 2-11

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

10-6

Brake warning light ............................................ 2-12

Door open warning light ................................... 2-12

Low tire pressure warning light ...................... 2-13

Seat belt warning light ...................................... 2-14

Warning lights............................................................ 2-11

Warning, Hazard warning flasher switch ............ 2-27

Warning, Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) .................................................................. 5-3, 6-2

Warning, Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders..................................................................... 2-11

Warranty, Emission control system warranty ..... 9-23

Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washer switch........ 2-22

Windshield wiper and washer switch ........... 2-21

Washing......................................................................... 7-2

Waxing............................................................................ 7-3

Weights (See dimensions and weights) ............... 9-8

Wheel/tire size.............................................................. 9-8

Wheels and tires ....................................................... 8-30

Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels ....................... 7-4

Window washer fluid ............................................... 8-14

Window(s)

Automatic adjusting function ........................... 2-40

Cleaning................................................................... 7-3

Power windows................................................... 2-39

Windshield wiper and washer switch.................. 2-21

Wiper

Rear window wiper and washer switch........ 2-22

Windshield wiper and washer switch ........... 2-21

Wiper blades ....................................................... 8-19

Xenon headlights....................................................... 2-24

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

10-7

MEMO

10-8

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)

number (Research octane number 96).

If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded

regular gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI

number (Research octane number 91) may be

temporarily used, but only under the following

precautions:

쐌 Have the fuel tank filled only partially with

unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with

unleaded premium gasoline as soon as pos-

sible.

쐌 Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accelera-

tion.

However, for maximum vehicle perfor-

mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso-

line is recommended.

CAUTION

쐌 Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

the warranty coverage.

쐌 Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because

this will damage the three-way cata-

lyst.

쐌 Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is not designed to run

on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can

damage the fuel system components

and is not covered by the NISSAN

vehicle limited warranty.

For additional information, see “Capacities and

recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Techni-

cal and consumer information” section.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

쐌 Engine oil with API Certification Mark

쐌 Viscosity SAE 5W-30

See “Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants” in the “9. Technical and consumer

information” section for engine oil and oil filter

recommendation.

COLD TIRE INFLATION

PRESSURES:

The label is typically located on the driver side

center pillar or on the driver’s door. For addi-

tional information, see “Wheels and tires” in the

“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN

PROCEDURES

RECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of ve-

hicle use, follow the recommendations outlined

in the “Break-in schedule” information found in

the “5. Starting and driving” section of this

Owner’s Manual. Follow these recommenda-

tions for the future reliability and economy of

your new vehicle.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

1. Engine oil (P.8-9)

2. Brake fluid (P.8-13)

3. Meters and gauges (P.2-3)

4. Fuel-filler door release (P.3-23)

5. Hood release (P.3-8)

6. Seat belt (P.1-10)

7. Door lock/key (P.3-2)

8. Rear hatch release (Coupe) (P.3-9) or Trunk

lid release (Roadster) (P.3-10)

9. Engine coolant (P.8-8)

10. Window washer fluid (P.8-14)

11. Power steering fluid (P.8-12)

12. Battery (P.8-15)

13. Audio system (P.4-12)/

Heater and air conditioner (P.4-9)

14. Soft top (Roadster models) (P.3-13)

15. Fuel (P.3-23, P.9-3)

16. Spare tire (P.6-3, P.8-38)

STI0364

QUICK REFERENCE

墌 08.7.24/Z33-D/V5.0 墍

2008 Nissan 350Z

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Nissan 2008 NISSAN 350Z Questions and Answers

Related Products

Vevor DQ9003H3 Ignition Coil Pack and Spark Plugs Set for Nissan Infiniti EX35 High Performance and Reliability

Vevor DQ9003B Ignition Coil Pack and Spark Plugs Set of 6 Compatible with Nissan Infiniti

Vevor Ignition Coil Pack and Spark Plugs Set of 4 for Nissan Altima Versa Reliable Performance and Compatibility

DK2 86625 Custom Mount Kit Nissan Titan '04-'15, Armada '04-'15

DK2 Mount Kit for Nissan Frontier Pickup 05-18, Xterra 05-14, Pathfinder 05-15 - Custom Fit and Easy Installation

DK2 86620 Custom Mount Kit Nissan Frontier Pickup '98-'04, Xterra '99-'04